Home

NEC 140Rc-4 Server User Manual

Contents

1. 8 10 Troubleshooting Power Lamp The power supply unit has the Power lamp When the power of the server is turned on the lamp goes on green If the lamp is not lit after turning on the power of the server the power supply unit may be defected Contact you service representative to replace the power supply unit POWER lamp NOTE The server equipped with an optional power supply unit can continue the operation with the standard power supply unit if the other power supply unit is defected redundant function The defected power supply unit can be replaced with a new one in the hot swap mode without power interruption Troubleshooting 8 11 LAN Connector Lamps LAN1 and LAN2 connectors on the rear panel have two lamps as follows N DOO maA aA aA m M 00 0 mE AAO Ape mo o m me a aA m M i
2. MOOD ME a a m A Blank cover 14 15 16 17 18 Upgrading Your Server 9 73 Remove the screw located on the bracket of the rear serial cable connector Hook the bracket of the rear serial cable connector from the inside of the rear face Fix the serial cable connector from the outside of the rear face with a single screw removed in step 14 Change the settings of the jumpers on the baseboard if it 1s necessary See the jumper positions shown in the figure below IMPORTANT Do not change the other jumper settings Failure to follow it may cause the unit to be defected or some malfunction to occur Install the removed parts When the cable is reinstalled on the front of the server route the cable below the guide rail for the PCI board from the position shown in the figure below 9 74 Upgrading Your Server This page is intentionally left blank Appendix A Specifications NEC Express5800 140Rc 4 N8100 1023F N8100 1024F Model type at shipment CPU Intel Xeon processor MP 1 Memory Expansion times Memory mirroring Available feature Online sparing memory feature Auxiliary input device 730 GB 146 GB x 5 5 25 inch device bay Additional 6 slots ao 2 slot
3. 1 Power supply unit The power supply unit supplies DC powers to the server The slot 1 3 is for optional slot 2 Power lamp When the power of the server is turned on the lamp goes on green 3 AC Standby lamp If the power cord is connected to the AC inlet to supply AC power to the power supply unit the lamp goes on green except for the lamp indicated AC_R If the power system of the server is in the redundant function after turning on the server the lamp indicated AC_R goes on green 4 5 25 inch device bay Backup tape drives may be installed in the 5 25 inch device bay 5 CD ROM drive The CD ROM drive reads data from the inserted CD ROM 5 1 Access lamp lit orange during accessing 5 2 CD tray eject button 5 3 Emergency hole 6 3 5 inch floppy disk drive Insert a 3 5 inch floppy disk to the 3 5 inch floppy disk drive to read data from the disk or write data to the disk 6 1 Eject button 6 2 Disk inserting section 6 3 Floppy disk access lamp lit green during accessing 7 3 5 inch hard disk bay The 3 5 inch hard disk bay contains additional hard disk slots Hard disks having the thickness of 1 inch can be inserted into the slots The SCSI IDs are defined as follows IDO to ID4 from right to left 8 Disk lamp green amber The disk lamp is lit green if a hard disk installed in the server is accessed If a hard disk is defected the lamp is lit amber Duri
4. O gt sF El 2 2 ot Gc eo KAk Oe reer eed Tel Grell l le FE REAR serial interface 7 100BASE TX Fy lololA D 10BASE T fel 4 z SCSI device s gt SERR nj Fal lt a eaa Cor Ss 1000BASE T SS Keyboard CS 100BASE TX QF Hub Mouse 3 10BASE T multiport repeater Device with the serial interface e g modem Direct connection to the private on LAN telephone line is prohibited p p A Display unit LAP connected Device with USB interface via a hub e q terminal adapter lt 2 nae SI d Network system 1 To connect the external SCSI devices change the baseboard cable connection 2 A leased line cannot be connected directly to this connector The console of a management PC can be connected to only serial port B BIOS setting required Connect the console to only serial port B on either the front or rear panel To connect the rear side serial port B change the baseboard cable connection with rear side serial cable that comes with the server 3 26 Setting Up Your Server Connection to Serial Ports Various types of serial devices can be connected to the RJ 45 serial ports on the front or rear panels of the server Some devices require the setting of the jumper pin JP25 on the baseboard to be changed according to the DCD DSR signal specification or they need to
5. 1 O MLM lil il Inn bial MN O ol i i et o Mm imja minmin Elnan an an a BHB HBB Aly S SB mio oo ooo oo mioo noonoo oo 7 OY IO QOH QQ yy Otay o By yl fay a Hy G fo aleae eaa eala aaa ya pa eae 8 o EIEE NE E E B G E o 20 13 1 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 2 1 AC inlet 1 The AC inlet 1 is connected with the power cord coming with the server 2 AC inlet 2 The AC inlet 2 is used when the additional power supply unit is installed in the server 3 ICMB 1 left ICMB 2 right connector The ICMB connector is connected to a device having the ICMB interface 4 Serial port B connector The serial port B connector is used to connect the server to a device with the serial interface The server cannot be directly connected to a leased line through the connector For using this port the rear serial cable that comes with your server should be connected to this connector 5 External SCSI connector The external SCSI connector is used to connect the server to external SCSI devices For the connection attached SCSI cable is necessary and some cable connections must be changed on the baseboard 6 PCI slot power lamp green upper The PCI slot power lamp is lit when the power of the PCI slot being on 6 PCI slot fault lamp amber lower PCI slot fault lamp blinks when the hot plug PCI function is enabled with Windows 2000 The lamp also goes on if a fault occur
6. LINK ACT lamp 100 10 lamp LAN1 connector LAN2 connector m LINK ACT lamp The link ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equipped with the server If the power is supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly connected with each other the lamp is lit green LINK state If information is transmitted through a network port the lamp blinks green ACT state If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state check the network cable and the cable connection If the lamp is not lit still after the checking the network LAN controller may be defected Contact your service representative m 100 10 lamp LANI The 100 10 lamp indicates whether the LAN1 port normally equipped with the server is operated through the 1OOBASE TX or 1OBASE T network interface Ifthe lamp is lit amber the network port is operated through LOOBASE TX Ifthe lamp is off the network port is operated through 1OBASE T m 1000 100 10 lamp LAN2 The 1000 100 10 lamp indicates whether the LAN2 port normally equipped with the server is operated through the 1OOOBASE T 100BASE TX or 10BASE T network interface Ifthe lamp is lit amber the network port is operated through 1O00BASE T If the lamp is lit green the network port is operated through 1OOBASE TX If the lamp is off the network port is operated through 1OBASE T 8 12 Troubleshooting PCI Slot Lamps PCI Slot Fault Lamp PCI Slot Power Lamp E anann no
7. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Master Control Menu appears on the screen automatically If the CD ROM Autorun function is invalid in your system run the MC IST EXE file in the CD ROM directly Some items are grayed out when the logon user does not have the authority of the administrator or the system is not proper for the installation of the applications To use Master Control Menu m Click on Online Document Setup or Quit or m Click the right mouse button on the Master Control Menu window 6 14 Installing and Using Utilities CONFIGURATION DISKETTE CREATOR Configuration Diskette Creator is a tool to create Configuration Diskette that is used for configuring the server with the Express Setup see Chapter 5 for details If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration Diskette Creator to operate the setup you can setup from the installation of OS to several utilities automatically except for a few key input to confirm the specification Also you can install the system with the same specification as before when re installing the system We recommend you to create Configuration Diskette to setup the servers from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NOTE You can install Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 without Configuration Diskette Also you can modify newly create Configuration Diskette during the setup with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Installing Configuratio
8. Enabled POST Display Mode Diagnostic SCSI Controller Int 13 Support Enabled Options Listed Below Have NO EFFECT if Int 13 Support is Disabled Domain Validation Enabled Support Removable Disks Under Int 13 as Fixed Disks Disabled BIOS Support for Bootable CD ROM Enabled 4 42 Configuring Your Server The following table lists submenu items available parameter and descriptions Submenuitem Parameter__ Description O Z O Z O Reset SCSI Bus at Enabled Select Enabled IC Initialization Disabled Display lt Ctrl gt lt A gt Enabled Select Enabled Message During Disabled BIOS Initialization Extended Int 13 Enabled Select Enabled Translation for DOS Disabled Driver gt 1 GByte POST Display Mode Verbose Select Diagnostic Silent Diagnostic SCSI Controller Int Enabled Enable or disable SCSI BIOS 13 Support Disabled Select Enabled for most cases other than the NOT Scan following Disabled To boot the OS from a hard disk connected to scan bus any other controller than SCSI controller on the baseboard If the controller on the baseboard has no hard disks connected there is no problem BIOS of the SCSI cont
9. ccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeseeseeeseaeeeeeaeneessneneensoes 1 1 IVY ab Nd Labe 1S 2 125 ses ee 2 vacontoat E EON EE enous EEE E E N 1 2 ROHS eI NU 0 ci iaaa a RE ee SRCE EeE e E ee 1 3 E alo AN echt Masts T E a Oar A ATE ea acs tases uve daar tases tase aussie aon ete adnan een merous 1 3 Notes on Installing and Accessing the Rack Cabinet cccccccsesessssseseeessseseseeeeeessssseeeas 1 5 Power supply and Power Cord USC smeroch aa a a O 1 6 Installation Relocation Storage and CoOnnection cccccccccccccsscecececeeceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeees 1 7 Cleaning and Working with Internal DeViCes cc ccc ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 9 D nne Operatoren ereeee een meen tte ante A ee re eee eee rn ene Eee ee ere eee ere 1 11 For Proper pe rattO ms cess cease scons scctnend sie ncutemaead tse acenaeinaed al oiemtatea ne auaeteminend ea eesemitetate 1 12 Transietto THRA Pay ee ce re ee ee re eee eee ree eee ee en ene ene eee eee 1 14 CO OMSUIMA DIES cenaterapiasssetsadasdes tana seesesatAdastauniaasaad ta ceanieasentanandeenssunssouniacdeaceus Paateauncusanigssaeeenecaiansate 1 15 Disposalof the SCT Cg hi lc cielo ecard ohm eet weet swe cts ome ween ome eee ees 1 15 USET SIO NON Gece eee eS a a wet ce cate ha einen a cece anaes 1 16 Chapter 2 General Description cccccccceeeeee cece neeeceneeeeeneseeseeseaseeseaeeesaaeeseanesseaneneas 2 1 OVET VON oa hen ee ea eit Se ey E
10. OBB1 SMBIOS SROM data checksum bad OBCO POST detected startup failure of 1st Contact your service representative to replace Processor the CPU POST detected startup failure of 2nd Processor OBDO 1st SMBus address not acknowledged Contact your service representative to replace OBD1 1st SMBus device Error detected the board specified in the system event log OBD2 1st SMBus timeout OBD4 2nd SMBus device Error detected OBD8 3rd SMBus timeout 5th SMBus address not acknowledged OBEY IPMB device Error detected OBEA IPMB timeout Contact your service representative to replace the board specified in the system event log Contact your service representative Troubleshooting 8 19 Error bade Error message Recommended Action 8120 Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group Contact your service representative to 1 replace the four DIMMs in the relevant 8121 Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group group 2 8122 Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group 3 8130 Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group 1 8131 Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group 2 Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group 3 See the labels put on the DIMMs to make sure that the DIMMs of the same type are installed in groups If DIMMs of different types are installed in one or more groups contact the service representative to replace DIMMs properly 8140 DIMM grou
11. m The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug information memory dump If you set the default value of paging file size smaller than the recommended value the accurate debug information memory dump may not be collected m The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size m The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if the mounted memory size is 512MB the minimally required partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 2900MB 512MB 1 5 512MB 12MB 4192MB Re installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk You cannot re install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained If you want to keep the current partition remained see Appendix D to re install the system Disk Configuration Concerning the area displayed as MAINTE_P In disk area an area displayed as MAINTE P may exist This area is maintenance partition for saving configuration information and utilities Do not delete the area Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 7 The Flow of Setup This section visually describes the f
12. See SCSI Disk Utilities for detail 4 39 4 40 Configuring Your Server Submenu item Parameter Description _ _ _ Z Sync Transfer Rate Select 320 MB Sec j You may need to change the value depending on your optional device Refer to the manual that comes with your optional device for details Packetized Optimizes bus utilization and minimizes No command overhead to bolster performance by transferring commands data and status using Deal Transition DT data phases Yes Quick Arbitration and Selection QAS No reduces the overhead of control release on the SCSI bus from one device to another to help decrease command overhead and increase bus utilization Select Yes if your SCSI device supports the Negotiation Wide SCSI interface Select No if not Enable Disconnection Yes Select Yes Data Se Select Yes to send the command to the Command No hard disk Otherwise select No BIOS Multiple LUN Yes Select No No Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 41 Advanced Configuration Move the cursor onto Advanced Configuration and press Enter to display the following submenu Advanced Configuration Reset SCSI Bus at IC Initialization Enabled Display lt Ctrl gt lt A gt Message During BIOS Initialization Enabled Extended Int 13 Translation for DOS Driver gt 1 GByte
13. Yes Enable Disconnection Yes Yes Send Start Unit Command BIOS Multiple LUN Support No Include in BIOS Scan Yes SCSI Device ID 8 Sync Transfer Rate MB Sec 320 Packetized Yes QAS 2222 22 22 222 enn nn nen nnn nnn No Initiate Wide Negotiation Yes Enable Disconnection Yes Send Start Unit Command Yes BIOS Multiple LUN Support No Include in BIOS Scan 1 2 320 320 Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes 9 10 320 320 Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes 3 4 5 6 7 320 320 320 320 320 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11 12 13 14 15 320 320 320 320 320 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes The following table lists submenu items available parameters and descriptions IMPORTANT Select a parameter for each submenu item on a per SCSI ID basis configuration Verify the SCSI ID of a desired device before NOTE To find out the SCSI ID for the optional device connected select SCSI Disk Utilities on the Options menu and press Enter
14. 2 Pull out the server from the rack with the power being on 3 Remove the rear access cover and locate the board to be removed NOTE Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off and that the PCI Slot Fault lamp is flashing 4 Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board 9 38 Upgrading Your Server 5 Push the tab to unlock it slowly open the tab then remove the PCI board IMPORTANT Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more Doing so could damage the tab NOTE The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots They are for protecting the PCI board already been installed Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the PCI board If the insulator is taken off reinstall the insulator in place Lock for long card 6 Install the dust cover and expansion slot cover on the slot from which you remove the PCI board then slowly close the tab NOTE Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp blinks once and that the PCI Slot Fault lamp is off If the PCI Slot Fault lamp is on open and close the tab again IMPORTANT To maintain the dust proofing and electromagnetic radiation characteristics and cooling performance of the server be sure to install the dust cover and the expansion slot cover on the slot from which you removed the PCI board 7 Reinstall the rear access cover and place the server into the rack Upgrading Your Server
15. 2 An appropriate parameter of the installed board is applied to the slot by the system after installing the board and rebooting the system To execute the PCI Hot plug function be sure to login the system as Administrator The board available for the hot addition varies depending on the clock rate previously set by PCI slots 5 and 6 or 7 and 8 Set the clock rate depending on the used PCI board appropriately referring to the description on the next page to use the BIOS Setup Utility Ifa PCI board operating at a different clock rate is subject to the hot addition the PCI slot fault lamp goes on and the hot plug cannot be done correctly However restarting the system allows BIOS to ignore the setting value and automatically operate the system with the optimum setting Advanced PCI Configuration Hot plug PCI Control Empty bus Default Speed Upgrading Your Server 9 31 Requirements for Hot Add No boards installed in the same bus BIOS setting Description PCI boards operating at any kind of clock speed PCI 33 MHz available for Hot Add However boards operating at over 66 MHz will operate at 33 MHz PCI boards operating at either PCI 66MHz or PCI X PCI 66 MHz 66MHz 100MHz available for Hot Add However boards operating at PCI X 66MHz 100MHz will operate at PCI 66MHz PCI boards operating at PCI X 66MHz 100MHz PCI X 66 MHz available for Hot Add However boards operating at PCI X 100MHz will oper
16. Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD ROM for the server For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard the playback of such a disk with the CD drive is not guaranteed Do not drop the CD ROM Do not place anything on the CD ROM or bend the CD ROM Do not attach any label onto the CD ROM Do not touch the signal side nothing is printed on this side with your hand Place the CD ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray Do not scratch the CD ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball point pen Keep the CD ROM away from cigarette smoke Do not leave the CD ROM in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD ROM wipe the CD ROM from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently Use the CD cleaner to clean the CD ROM Do not use record spray cleaner benzene or thinner Keep the CD ROM in a CD ROM case when not in use If the CD ROM emits large noise in the CD ROM drive remove the CD ROM and insert it back again Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system on a step by step basis 3 2 Setting Up Your Server SETUP FLOW Follow the flowchart below to set up the server Selecting a site Select a suitable site for the server ss Unpacking the system Unpack the server a
17. The access lamps for the floppy disk drive and the CD ROM drive light when access is made to a media in the drive 8 8 Troubleshooting Hard Disk Drive Lamp DISK Lamp The disk lamp on the 3 5 inch disk bay has different meanings depending on the display status DISK lamps ON N yj zi G M N A RII fii L DA A d ai ovo j S il f A Beed MN IKAN N i i S q I K m Lighting green The hard disk is installed and powered on m Blinking green Indicates that the hard disk is accessed m Lighting amber Indicates that the installed hard disk is defected in the disk array configuration NOTE While hard disks are in the disk array configuration RAID1 RAIDS5S or RAIDO 1 a single failed hard disk does not affect the operation of the server However it is recommended to replace the failed hard disk and auto rebuild reconfigure the hard disks as soon as possible You can hot swap such a failed hard disk m Alternate lighting green or amber Indicates that the hard disk is being rebuilt this status is not a failure Ifthe defected hard disk is replaced with a new one in the disk array configuration the data 1s automatically rebuilt auto rebuild function During the rebuild operation the lamp is lit green or amber alternatively The lamp goes off when the rebuild is terminated normally The lamp goes on amber if the rebuild fails Troubleshooting 8 9 IMPORTA
18. Use the clip over pins 1 and 2 Pins for protecting clearing the CMOS data Pins for protecting clearing the passwords m Pins for protecting clearing the passwords Short circuit these two pins to clear the passwords Open these two pins to protect the passwords factory set m Pins for protecting clearing the CMOS data Short circuit these two pins to clear the CMOS data Open these two pins to protect the CMOS data factory set Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch Run BIOS setup utility to reconfigure the baseboard Save and exit the utility 10 Restore the jumper switch setting and power on the server for reconfiguration NOTE Place the clip over the jumper pins 1 and 2 after use to keep the pin yee 1 and 2 Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following operating systems to the server m Microsoft Windows Server 2003 m Microsoft Windows 2000 To use the server with the other operating systems described in this section contact your service representative IMPORTANT Before installing the operating system adjust the system date and time by using the BIOS set up utility SETUP See Chapter 4 for detail 5 2 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup About Express Setup Express Setup contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM is intended for initial setup of t
19. m The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified from the operating system In order to retain the Configuration Data do not delete the partition NOTES m The maintenance partition once created will not be recreated again m When the maintenance partition does not exist some menu items do not appear Create Maintenance Partition NEC EXPRESSBUILDER creates about 55MB of the maintenance partition on the system disk or disk array system as work area The various utilities are installed when the maintenance partition is created successfully or when the maintenance partition is already created Install Maintenance Partition Utilities Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD ROM Maintenance Partition Update Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk This menu is only used when the update disk is supplied from your service representative or attached with your system FDISK Execute FDISK command of ROM DOS system You can create delete partitions etc Installing and Using Utilities 6 9 m BIOS FW etc Update This menu allows you to update the software module such as BIOS and firmware of the server by using the update disk 3 5 inch floppy disk that is distributed from NEC customer service representative After rebooting the system an update program is started automatically from the floppy disk and the various BIOS and firm
20. AC LINK Last State F1 Help t Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Ese Exit lt Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit See the table below for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting Service Indicates the type of the service partition Type Press Enter and select Yes to initialize the Log system event log Assert NMI Disabled Indicates whether PCI PERR is supported or on PERR Enabled not If this item is set Enabled the system offers an error through the NMI when an error occurred Assert NMI Disabled Indicates whether PCI SERR is supported or on SERR Enabled not If this item is set Enabled the system offers an error through the NMI when an error occurred Disable FRB2 Timer Set this item to Disable BSP Disable BSP Do Not Disable BSP Retry 3 Times 4 28 Configuring Your Server Option Parameter Description Your Setting Boot Disabled Indicates whether the boot monitoring Monitoring 5 Minutes function is enabled or disabled on booting 10 Minutes To use this function install NEC ESMPRO 15 Minutes Agent Do not use this function if the system 20 Minutes is booted from OS without installation of NEC 25 Minutes ESMPRO Agent or CD ROM Set this item to 30 Minutes Disabled if ARCServe uses the Disaster 35 Minutes Recovery Option 40 Minutes 45 Minutes 50 Minutes 55 Minutes 60 Minutes Boot Retry 3 Times Appears when the boot monit
21. Back or Help on the screen to continue Modify the specification each time if necessary 5 28 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup IMPORTANT m Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally required size m Ifyou select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration the information included in the first partition excluding maintenance partition will all be formatted and deleted The information included in the other partition will be retained In the figure below describes the partition which information will be deleted when maintenance partition exists m You can not re install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained Do not select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration m If Create New Partition at New Existing RAID Configuration is selected do not specify the value for the partition more than the actual area size m Ifyou specify other than 4095MB for the Installing Partition it is necessary to convert to NTFS m Ifyou specify other than 120GB for the actual area you may not create the partition specified as the entire area in sizes more than 120GB m If Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration is selected but the partition other than the one to install Windows 2000 does not exist excluding maintenance partition Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk to install
22. Do not install SNMP Agent MegaRAID Service Monitor Enables NEC ESMPRO to monitor the MegaRAID controller by registering event logs Install MegaRAID Service Monitor in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted MegaRAID Client Controls the RAID system on graphical screens Install MegaRAID Client in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted or in the management PC that is connected through the NEC Express server and network MegaRAID Server Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network Install MegaRAID Server in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted MegaRAID Registration Server Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network Install in one of NEC Express servers and management PCs that are connected through network The above components must be installed correctly for establishing the environment to use Power Console Plus 6 28 Installing and Using Utilities Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers and management PC m Server NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted Install the following three components in this server MegaRAID Service Monitor MegaRAID Server MegaRAID Client m Management PC Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the network TCP IP When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server Versi
23. If Disabled is selected console redirection feature is disabled Baud Rate 9600 Specify the baud rate used for the 19 2k interface with successive hardware 38 dk consoles 57 6k 115 2k Flow Control None Specify the flow control method XON XOFF CTS RTS CTS RTS CD Console Type PC ANSI Specify the console type VT100 VT UTF8 Remote Console Disabled Specify whether the reset from remote Reset Enabled console is enabled or disabled Factory set 4 32 Configuring Your Server Boot Positioning the cursor on Boot shows the Boot menu which is used to set the boot priority Main Advanced Security Server The server searches for devices in the order set in this menu on booting Finding the boot software the server starts the software The priority of the boot devices can be changed by using the f and keys Move the cursor to the desired device with the f or key and change the priority with the or key IMPORTANT To boot NEC EXPRESSBUILDER set the priority of the devices as shown in the figure above Configuring Your Server 4 33 Exit Positioning the cursor to Exit shows the Exit menu The options on the menu are described below Main Advanced Security Server Exit Saving Changes Select this item to terminate SETUP after saving the newly selected information in CMOS non volatile memory The selection of Exit Saving Changes causes the confirmation screen to appe
24. Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB 4 Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter When PROSet is installed 1 The Intel PROSet dialog box appears The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu point to Control Panel and click Intel PROSet The procedure in the case of the classic start menu 1 Click Start menu point to Settings and click Control Panel 2 Double click Intel R PROSet on the Control Panel window Click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Speed and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex Settings value the same as the value specified for HUB 4 Click Apply and click OK Specify the other network driver with the same progress above Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection Installing Windows Server 2003 D 11 NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor frames or packets sent or received by a computer on which Network Monitor is installed This is an effective tool for analyzing network faults For information about the installation procedure see Chapter 6 Re install the Network Driver The network driver will be installed automatically Installing SCSI Controller Driver If you u
25. NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Statement Warning This is a Class A product In domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures EN55022 BSMI Statement Bate ae 7c PBR azo gt TEE ERE SEP EA Re gt BRE Se AA AERAN P gt 5 FA ER ER AY SE ei ST RR o This system is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT This CLASS 1 label is located on the internal CD ROM installed in your system LASER PRODUCT Trademarks NEC ESMPRO and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are trademarks of NEC Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows 2000 and MS DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Xeon is a trademark of Intel
26. Software License Agreement screen appears Read the contents carefully and click I agree or press F8 if you do agree If you do not agree click I disagree or press F3 IMPORTANT Ifyou do not agree to this agreement the setup terminates and Windows Server 2003 will not be installed m If NetWare Gateway and Client Service is specified to install the window to specify the details of NetWare Gateway and Client Service pops up on the first logon Specify the appropriate value Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed 5 12 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Installing and Setting Device Drivers Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu and click Windows Explorer The procedure
27. Test Result Guide line Test window Test window shows a name of this diagnosis and Version information shows the progress of diagnosis When it completes it shows Test End shows the information including time of start end and progress and result of the diagnosis shows a description of keys to navigate the window Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the diagnosis If an error is detected during the System Diagnostics the test result shows Abnormal End in red color Move the cursor and press Enter on the diagnosis which error occurred Take a note of the error message showed and contact your sales agent 7 10 Maintenance 7 Follow the Guide line showed in the bottom of the screen and press ESC to show the End user Menu showed below TeDoLi TEst amp Diagnosis On Linux Ver001 00 Build020901 1 1m Enduser Menu lt Device List gt lt Log Info gt lt Option gt lt Reboot gt Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key lt Test Result gt shows the screen of the diagnosis completed aforementioned lt Device List gt shows the information of all the devices connected lt Log Info gt shows the log information and error messages of the diagnosis it can be saved to a floppy disk To save the log information to a floppy disk insert a formatted floppy disk to a floppy disk drive and select lt SavelF gt lt Option gt change where to output l
28. The removal of the SCSI cable for 5 25 inch device in the server and the connection of the SCSI cable coming with the server for external connection are required Modification of SCSI device connections within the server If the SCSI BIOS setup utility is terminated the server runs POST from its start again When more than one SCSI controller boards are installed on the PCI bus of the server the messages indicating the starts of the SCSI BIOS setup utilities for the installed boards appear in the following order PCI slot number PCI 1 PCI 2 PCI 3 PCI 4 PCI 5 PCI 6 PCI 7 and PCI 8 General Description 2 29 Displays the SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices on the screen If one or more disk array controllers are installed displays the message prompting you to start the Disk Array BIOS setup utility Start the utility according to the message if you need to change the settings Refer to the manuals of the disk array controllers for details Without any entry any of the following messages appears Displays the message notifying you of the detection of the CPU and the connected keyboard and mouse Displays any of the following messages Pattern 1 Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP or lt F12 gt to Network Pattern 2 Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP lt F4 gt Service Partition lt F12 gt to
29. cause a fire Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet which may cause a fire Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug imperfect contact may cause a fire Heat will also be generated if condensation is formed on dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug increasing the possibility of fire Use the authorized power cord only Use only the power cord that comes with your server Use of an unauthorized power cord may cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow Also observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a damaged cord Do not stretch the cord harness Do not pinch the power cord Do not bend the power cord Keep chemicals away from the power cord Do not twist the power cord Do not place any object on the power cord Do not bundle power cords Do not alter modify or repair the power cord Do not secure the power cord with staples or equivalents Do not use any damaged power cord Replace a damaged power cord with a new one of the same specifications Ask your service representative for replacement Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect with this server and to use with the serve
30. 2000 Installation Installing Service Pack You can install the Service Pack on the server When the Service Pack 1s not attached to your system prepare it by yourself Updating System If you change the configuration of the system update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system Disk Configuration Concerning the area displayed as MAINTE_P In disk area an area displayed as MAINTE P may exist This area is maintenance partition for saving configuration information and utilities Please do not delete the area E 2 Installing Windows 2000 Re installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk If there is other partition than the partition for OS installation and you want to leave it when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk note the following issue C D System Area Data Area t When you want to leave this partition m Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS newly m Select Use the current File System for the format of OS partition MO Device If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation the file system will not be converted normally Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning Media such as DAT During the OS installation do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system such as DAT Inst
31. 24 Connechonto renal POr Seaain n a a a a 3 26 Connection to ExtemalS CSL DEVI CES stasira a a a 3 32 Conne cue Power COT rai ja sc peas a T 3 33 Tinie Ome Seb y Coca si tees cc cern eaten cal died es Paseeadl i uae dna tien cal ied ae peasant 3 35 iS talline Operate SysSense Donic cid sind duty Desisiriaied dinate Deaidh caut dies auastaniid dasha staat 3 37 Gat 2 Ub arom UES peeen een eee ener cn ete ee een ne ene ne cece eee ee aren eee ee ere eee cere ree eee eee eee 3 37 Making Backup Copies of System Information cccccccccccccccccceccceceeeeeceeeeceeceeesceeeseeseeeeseeeeees 3 37 Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server cccccsseeeescsseeeeseseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeneeseneneesseeseensoes 4 1 Dy Stern BIOS SE TUP eee acct aceasta doce A eee ae Seca 4 SS E TUP UUN ee erent eer A nt Eee ree on en eae 4 2 Description on On Screen Items and Key Usage cccccccccccccccscseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseesseeeeeees 4 3 COMTI UE ALON Te XAOS 5465 ori todaretd patsy said E EEE 4 4 Ment and Parameter Descriptions seinors eniinn a DE E ES ETDE 4 9 SCS LBIO SSS C SDA An A A eee 4 35 NSS CS Sele Ce U erea aE E tetas ce taterite te ca 4 35 Configuring SCSI Controller on Baseboard cccccccccesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 36 Configuring SCSI Controller on Optional Board ccccccccccccceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 44 Configuring Baseboard Jumpers ccs tasctascs sccsauitaced
32. 8 you can replace or add a hot plug PCI board while the server is operating Only N8104 111 1OOBASE TX Adapter and N8104 103 1O00BASE T Adapter support the Hot plug PCI feature The PCI hot plug function includes the following functions m Hot Add Use Hot Add to install a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating m Hot Remove Use Hot Remove to remove a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating m Hot Replace Use Hot Replace to replace a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating IMPORTANT Before removing a PCI board be sure to stop the driver of the slot containing the PCI board from the operating system Windows 2000 Failure to do so may cause the system to fail For Windows 2000 server do not use a function in inactive state after executing the PCI Hot plug function The system fails to return to the original state when a function in inactive state is restarted Use the BIOS Setup utility to set the following before executing the PCI Hot Plug function Select Advanced PCI Configuration Hot plug PCI Control gt Reserving memory space for PHP Select memory space for installed board Select Advanced PCI Configuration gt Hot plug PCI Control gt Empty Bus Default Speed Select the frequency for installed board If this menu is set to other than Disabled the memory capacity appears to be less than the actually installed memory capacity
33. 9 39 Hot Replace Take the following procedure to execute the Hot Replace 1 Take the following steps to stop the device driver used by the Hot Plug PCI board you want to replace IMPORTANT Before removing a PCI board be sure to stop the driver of the slot containing the PCI board from the operating system Failure to do so may cause the system to fail 1 Open Add Remove Hardware in Control Panel The Add Remove Hardware Wizard starts 2 Click on Next Add Remove Hardware Wizard x Welcome to the Add Remove Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you add remove unplug and troubleshoot your hardware To continue click Next Cancel 3 Select Uninstall Unplug a device for hardware task then click on Next Add Remove Hardware Wizard Choose a Hardware Task Which hardware task do you want to perform Select the hardware task you want to perform and then click Next Add Troubleshoot a device Choose this option if you are adding a new device to your computer or are having problems getting a device working lt Back Cancel 9 40 Upgrading Your Server 4 Select Unplug Eject a device for removal task then click on Next Add Remove Hardware Wizard Choose a Removal Task You can remove a device permanently or temporarily 5 Select the target device then click on Next Add Remove Hardware Wizard Select Device to Unplug Selec
34. After removing the contents of the containers keep the cartons and the packing materials If the contents appear damaged when you unpack the boxes file a damage claim with the carrier immediately 3 6 Setting Up Your Server ASSEMBLING THE RACK MOUNT SYSTEM This subsection provides the instructions for the rack mount server unit into a standard EIA 19 inch rack cabinet This subsection also describes the removal procedures for the rack mount server unit from the 19 inch rack cabinet 44 WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details SA m Do not use any rack which does not conform to the relevant standard m Disconnect the power cord s before installing or removing the server 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack Do not lift the server only by a single person Always install the server in the specified place Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components 5S PDP Setting Up Your Server 3 7 ESD Precaution An electrostatic discharge ESD can damage disk drives opti
35. Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table provides a table to be filled with your server configuration Text Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this User s Guide For safety symbols see SAFETY INDICATIONS provided earlier IMPORTANT Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server NOTE Notes give important information about the material being described IN THE PACKAGE The carton contains various accessories as well as the server itself See the packing list to make sure that you have everything and that individual components are not damaged If you find any component missing or damaged contact your service representative m Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience You will need them to install an optional device or troubleshoot the server as well as to set it up m Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk if any Store the original disk as the master disk in a designated place and use its copy Improper use of any provided floppy disk or CD ROM may alter your system environment If you find anything unclear immediately ask your service representative for help This page is intentionally left blank CONTENTS PPR ST ACC eee arcadia cares ea eid seen I AE E sae dea Wiese A E A Mauanaaust Yat T i Aboot This Users Gun etic a E E OA ii Nae nea bars e eee AA A A E A A A E A A A E ee il Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Servel
36. Configuration Record Table Backup Device Slot 1 Size Capacity Serial No Model name Type number Date Installed PCI Slot 1 TE cael Date sted PCI Slot 2 RR ced Date sed PCI Slot 3 Model name Serial No Date Installed PCI Slot 4 Model name Serial No Date Installed fae PCI Slot 5 Date Installed Model name Serial No Po aate instaled PCI Slot 7 Model name Serial No Date Installed PCI Slot 8 Model name Serial No Date Installed Le Printer Model name Serial No Manufacturer atte Installed Additional Cabinet for Disk Modelname Jo SeriatNow Date Installed External Peripheral Device 1 Model name Serial No Manufacturer TT Date Installed External Peripheral Device 2 Modelname CLC C dSeriNow Manufacturer Date Installed Display SS eee Manufacturer CS Datelnstaled Modelname oT SeriatNo Manufacturer atte Installed Mouse Model name Serial No Manufacturer J atte Installed Product Configuration Record Table F 3 Software Firmware version OS Name Version Application of RUR media O Apply Name Version File system 0 FAT O HPFS O NTFS O Others re Licensed software installed Application running when a failure occurred F 4 Product Configuration Record Table This page is intentionally left blank
37. Corporation Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc of the United States Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight Inc ROM DOS is a registered trademark of Datalight Inc AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries Adaptec and its logo is a registered trademark of Adaptec Inc of United States SCSISelect is a trademark of Adaptec Inc of the United States Adobe Adobe logo and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation of the United States All other product brand or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective trademark owners Windows 2000 stands for Microsoft Windows 2000 Server operating system and Microsofta Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system Windows 2003 stands for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Server operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition and Enterprise Edition Windows NT stands for Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system version 3 51 4 0 and Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system version 3 51 4 0 Windows Me stands for Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Windows 98 stands for Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Windows 95 stands for M
38. Do not set any password before installing the OS m The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility Dialog boxes appear on your SETUP utility thus may differ from descriptions in this manual If you find anything unclear see the online help or ask your service representative 4 2 Configuring Your Server Starting SETUP Utility To run the SETUP utility perform the following procedures 1 Turn on the power of the server The NEC logo appears on the screen the POST screen may appear depending on the setting in SETUP After a while any of the following messages appears at the bottom of the screen Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP or lt F12 gt to Network Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP lt F4 gt Service Partition lt F12 gt to Network ao J B B p3 as r Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to enter Setup lt F12 gt to Network gr fas oO 2 Pattern 4 Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to enter Setup lt F4 gt Service Partition lt F12 gt Network The displayed message varies depending on the device status Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility the password entry screen appears
39. EE eat Sea heals aa dees ak ota ere E 2 2 OO VS Wy ona a a aeaa a a 2 3 POMC VLC Wy aera e A E E A A 2 4 Front View with Front Bezel ReEmMO Ve sosccw acanecsastals x atroachiaamvietew os eh R RERE 2 5 Front View s witches and amps serado ninian a E E E T E O EREA 2 6 TS al A o ET EE E EA AEE O tee ATOE E AAA E AE T EAA T A A ET PE 2 7 EEEa T e E E E N P T EAE A ET AAAS AEEA IERE AAEE A EAE AAE 2 9 Electonics AY ects cnet vacate dicta a a A T A 2 10 Ba DO e a T a E a E A eee 2 11 Froces sor Board aa a a a a a 2 12 Memory Bodil oir c ineei a a A tes 2 13 Sandar Tea NiTe orae ia E A e a S 2 14 Power SUPP e Seer a A a oak einen ees 2 15 PEEPI TALB A Sashes a a as ne aac cee eee 2 15 Memory Mirono PCAC carmini E E E TE a AaS 2 16 Online Sparina Memory FeaT Emediate a a aa 2 16 Ar DE OD Cie a E E E E OE E OT E a eet 2 17 SYS let OO NING yrei ca aata tease aad dada teacult daaaaba Meas aakd deans tauacaet a aaeaba susan dada che 2 17 Sy Stet Board Meatless nicnn cesses deleted attend ial as cceseaald Cat sua tain kd deel aie ae 2 18 BG CURLEY aotcanas dacs siasegtaas teiaceiaaseumacuutasaasiaseasesuad TETT 2 22 NEC EXPRESS BUILDER 4s tsseste sea pmcessd a cial Siete eee erecta aah 2 23 NEC ESMPRO iene ie eee sae eae er eee eee elas tee eae caters 2 24 Off line Maintenance Witty sass chia die cabana edie acids Gioia Gaara ens 2 24 System Diagnostio CUI os se Gs oE E be esteem 2 24 NEC Management Workstation Application NEC MWA cc
40. Installation Install a memory board in the following procedure 1 Hold the both edges blue marking of the memory board 2 Insert the memory board into the guides at both ends of the electronics bay 3 Align the board with the connector on the processor board and press down on the board until it is fully inserted into the connector IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the memory board and DIMM do not tilt the board while pressing down to the system 4 Reinstall the removed components Upgrading Your Server 9 47 DIMM Install the additional DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module to the DIMM socket on the baseboard in the server The memory board is provided with 12 DIMM board slots The memory board contains 12 sockets in which DIMMs are installed Four 256MB DIMMs are normally installed in DIMM group 1 The DIMMs normally installed may be replaced DIMMs are installed on the sockets in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers in the unit of four modules NOTE Up to 24GB of memory 2GB DIMM x 12 can be installed IMPORTANT m The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the DIMM Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place the DIMM directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier m Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by N
41. Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic utility set up a maintenance partition and update the various BIOS programs NEC Express5800 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Ver3 xxxx x Copyright C NEC Corporation 2003 Tools Menu RAID Board Present Save Restore RAID Configuration Data Tora Drives 7 Drives in Group 1 Off line Maintenance Utility Hot Spares 1 System Diagnostics Create Support Disk Setup Maintenance Partition BIOS FW etc Update System Management Help Return to the Top Menu RAID Level 7 Write Mode WRITE_THRU Maint Part Present 6 6 Installing and Using Utilities m Save Restore RAID Configuration Data The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved or restored from the floppy disk Save Disk Array Configuration Data The configuration information on the disk array controller is saved into the floppydisk If you set or change RAID always use this function to save the configuration information into a floppy disk Restore Disk Array Configuration Data The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and hard disk on the disk array controller If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake restore the configuration information When the defected disk array controller is replaced the configuration information on the hard disk must be saved into the disk array controller However if the configuration info
42. Network Or Pattern 3 Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to enter Setup lt F12 gt to Network Pattern 4 Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to enter Setup lt F4 gt Service Partition lt F12 gt Network The displayed message may vary depending on the device status 2 30 General Description NOTE The operation or utility to be started at each key entry is described below These operations or utilities may not always be started m Esc Press Esc to display the boot menu at the end of POST This menu allows you to select the device to be started CD ROM Drive tRemovable Devices tHard Drive IBA 4 0 19 Slot 0003 IBA 1 0 17 Slot 0103 lt Enter Setup gt a F2 Press F2 to start the BIOS setup utility Start the utility to change the setting of the server to that fit to the environment in which the server is used In general the setting may not be particularly changed by starting the utility excluding the case in which the previous message accompanying by an error message appears See Chapter 4 for the setting procedures and features of the parameters m F4 Press F4 to start the Off line Maintenance Utility from the maintenance partition See Chapter 6 for the maintenance partition m F12 Press F12 to run the network boot m F1 If message Press lt F1 gt to resume appears an error is
43. System with Express Setup IMPORTANT m Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally required size m Ifyou select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration the information included in the first partition excluding maintenance partition will all be formatted and deleted The information included in the other partition will be retained In the figure below describes the partition which information will be deleted when maintenance partition exists m You can not re install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained Do not select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration m If Create New Partition at New Existing RAID Configuration is selected do not specify the value for the partition more than 120GB m Ifyou specify other than 4095MB for the Installing Partition it is necessary to convert to NTFS m If Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration is selected but the partition other than the one to install Windows Server 2003 does not exist excluding maintenance partition Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk to install Windows Server 2003 m You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect m On specification an error may occur in relationship with the specified contents of the former screen and require to go back to modify the specification During the setup the
44. _ Isa floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Take out the floppy disk and restart the server Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and restart the server LJ Is the OS broken Use recovery process to recover the system See Recovery for Windows 2000 in this Chapter The event log after every logon to Windows 2000 includes the following error log Description D The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of the least capable processor in the system Should problems occur with this system contact the CPU manufacture to see if this mix of processors is supported C Has the CPU been expanded Ifthe different revision stepping of the processor is installed in the multiprocessor system Windows 2000 logs the above information every startup If this message is logged it is no problem for operation The OS presents unstable operation C Did you update the system Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable operation Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM to update the system See Chapter 6 When any trouble occurred the system does not run according to the specification of Restart automatically When any trouble occurred on Windows 2000 the system may not restart automatically even if Restart aut
45. a wrong connector A leased line cannot be connected directly to the serial port connectors Secure the power cord s and interface cables with a lock spring Form the cables in such a way that they will not come into contact with the door or the guide rails on the sides of the server Setting Up Your Server 3 25 Device with the serial interface e g Management PC Device with the USB Interface F oo NETI O 8o 0O Pio Olo 2 Eo O FRONT i Of I M ATO ojl Ijo Finally connect the provided l power cord to the receptacle When an optional power Printer with the If connecting the server to UPS supply unit is additionally parallel interface see the explanation below installed fa e aA
46. and status of the hardware and installation of OS and various utilities can be set up with Express Setup the attached CD ROM NEC EXPRESSBUILDER seamlessly ch a When you want to use the hard disk in the iWferent partition from the default setting or reiiMsiall the OS use this Express Setup This feature Weecutes troublesome setup procedures for you Before starting the setup procedteneet Express Setup edits the data necessary for the intended setup and saves the edited data to the floppy disk and then reads such the stored data during the setup to proceed a series of procedures The floppy disk used is called Configuration Diskette annul EE F Cs eo a aia foal tn Installing and Using Utilities 6 3 m DOS based with remote console Used to set up the server from the management workstation by accessing the server over the network or via COM B serial port NOTE No keyboard connected to the server is permitted to run this program m Windows based This program is called as Master Control Menu that can run under the Microsoft Windows system Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4 0 or later You can install the several applications and read the documentation from the menu Gp EXPRESSBUILDER Master Control Menu xX e Online Document NEC EXPRESSBUILDER A kapan _ master Control Mens Control Menu WA Setup N Quit Copyighi NEC Corporation NEC 6 4 Installing
47. and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS Based with Local Console This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with local console Starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The following procedure instructs you to start NEC EXPRESSBUILDER IMPORTANT Do not remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM while NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is running 1 Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM supplied with your server into the CD ROM drive of your server 3 Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty 4 Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu cp a anand ai w Er p EF ae ait 7 ir o r3 xxxx X Copyright C NEC Corpor ii aI wil Express Setup refers to the method unique to the system the internal parameters and status of the hardware and installation of OS and various utilities can be set up with the attached CD ROM NEC EXPRESSBUILDER seamlessly When you want to use the hard disk in the Wfherent partition from the default setting ll the OS use this Express Setup This feature Bmecutes troublesome setup procedures for your Before starting the setup proced me Express Setup edits the data necessary for the intended setup and saves
48. and take the end of the CD ROM lightly by the fingers of another hand with the suppression of the rotor at the center of the tray to remove the CD ROM from the tray General Description 2 37 After taking out the CD ROM return the tray into the drive When you fail to eject the CD ROM tray with the Eject button and take out the CD ROM from the server follow the procedure below 1 Press the POWER switch to power off the server The POWER SLEEP lamp goes off 2 Insert a metal pin of approximately 1 2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length a straightened large paper clip will make a substitute into the emergency hole on the upper front of the CD ROM drive and gently push it in until the tray is ejected IMPORTANT m Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break m Ifthe above procedure does not let you take out the CD ROM contact your service representative Emergency hole sail ore TOTO L f N CUCU CaOWCN om Ge Gus Ga omen aa Ga ED GED GED GE e Guy Gu Ga TRAD Been Tv l CIC ICICI CIN CI CDC IC OCC 3 JC pia IC IC IC pia IC IC IC IC gt Sac pm aam o aa 3 Hold the tray and pull it out 4 Take out the CD ROM 5 Push the tray back into position 2 38 General Description NOTE Use of the CD ROM
49. be connected via an optional serial port conversion cable There are two kind of cables in optional serial portconversion cable set The R label is attached to one cable used with this server and the F label is attached to the other not used with this server Regarding to this cable set contact your service representative for details IMPORTANT Inter equipment potential difference may cause a server failure Be sure to turn off the server and the connection destination equipment and disconnect the power cord before connecting disconnecting the cable to from the serial port The figure below shows the location of the jumper pin JP25 For methods to dismount the cover and other internal components see Chapter 9 Yy y Yy oad co 0 gagi q co Oo 0 0 DSR DCD DSR DCD Factory set EX Strapped Setting Up Your Server 3 27 Connection between the RJ 45 Serial Port and a Modem To connect a modem to the RJ 45 serial port use the optional serial port conversion cable with the R label attached Be careful not to use the other one with the F label attached Set the jumper pin to DCD DSR factory set IMPORTANT Make sure of the icon of the server and be sure to connect the cable to serial port B Be careful not to connect to a LAN port by mistake To prevent wrong connection write LAN port on a tag and put the tag to the connector of the LAN cable that is to be connected to this s
50. blank Chapter 2 General Description This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server It includes names and functions of the components and features of the server 2 2 General Description OVERVIEW Your server is a highly reliable high powered fault tolerant high capacity multiprocessing server based on the Intel Xeon Processor MP It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology The combination of compute performance memory capacity and integrated I O provides a high performance environment for many server market applications These range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking to obtain basic connectivity capability such as file and print services e mail web access web site server etc Your server is housed and available as a rack mount system Your server conveniently installs into a standard EIA 19 inch rack cabinet Your server includes a 3 5 inch diskette drive a CD ROM drive a 3 5 inch hard disk bay and removable media device bay The 3 5 inch hard disk bay supports up to five 1 0 inch SCSI hard disk drives that can be swapped in or out of the system without powering it down if RAID functionality is configured in the system As application requirements increase you can expand your server with an additional processor additional memory add in boards and peripheral devices tape devices CD ROM and hard disk drive
51. can be also identified with the BIOS SETUP utility m Fans m Processors CPUs Processor CPU 4 Processor CPU 3 Processor CPU 2 Processor CPU 1 m Memory board The DIMM group consists of four DIMM boards DIMM group 3 DIMM group 3 DIMM group 2 DIMM group 2 DIMM group 1 DIMM group 1 Troubleshooting 8 21 Beep Codes If an error occurs during the POST the server beeps indicating the type of error Each number indicates the number of short beeps and a hyphen indicates a pause For example the beep interval 1 2 2 3 indicates 1 beep pause 2 beeps pause 2 beeps pause and 3 beeps notifying that the checksum error occurred on ROM Beep code Description Recommended action Option ROM initialization 1 Check if the setting with SETUP is correct error 2 Remove the PCI board and install it again to check if it operates normally Replace the PCI board and check if it operates normally Replace the baseboard Video BIOS initialization Check if the connector of the display is properly error connected Replace the baseboard 223 ROM checksum error Replace the baseboard DRAM refresh test error 1 Check if the DIMM is properly installed 2 Remove the DIMM once and then re install it to check if it operates normally Ask your service representative to replace the failed DIMM or baseboard Keyboard controller er
52. conditions that could normally go unnoticed until data loss System Cooling The chassis includes a hot swappable fan module with six fans for cooling the processor s hard drives and PCI cards The fan system is located in the middle of the chassis to pull cooling air through the chassis 2 18 General Description System Board Features The following subsections describe the system board major components Processor The processor board accommodates one to four Intel Xeon processor MP with 512k 1MB cache in the FC PGA2 package DIMM Memory The memory board contains twelve 168 pin DIMM slots each supporting 72 bit ECC 64 bit main memory plus ECC registered PC 200 Double Data Rate DDR DIMMs Memory is partitioned in three banks You may install a minimum of 512 MB 128 MB x 4 or as much as 12 GB The controller automatically detects sizes and initializes the memory array depending on the type size and speed of the installed DIMMs and reports memory size and allocation to the server via configuration registers NOTE Use DIMMs that have been provided by NEC Contact your service representative or dealer for a current list of approved memory modules Onboard Video The baseboard incorporates an ATI RAGE XL PCI graphics accelerator with 4 MB of video SDRAM that supports all standard IBM VGA modes The embedded SVGA video subsystem supports m Pixel resolutions up to 1024 x 768 m CRT and LCD monitors up to 100 Hz
53. connector may cause an electric shock or a fire resulted from a short circuit Do not use any unauthorized interface cable Use only interface cables provided by NEC and locate a proper device and connector before connecting a cable Using an authorized cable or connecting a cable to an improper destination may cause a short circuit resulting in a fire Also observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable m Do not use any damaged cable connector Do not step on the cable m Do not place any object on the cable Do not use the server with loose cable connections Notes on Using Your Server 1 9 Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices A WARNING Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Never attempt to disassemble repair or alter the server on any occasion other than described in this manual Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server Do not look into the CD ROM drive A laser beam used in the CD ROM drive is harmful to the eyes Do not look into or insert a mirror into the drive while the drive is powered If a laser beam is caught in your eyes you may lose your eyesight the laser beam is invisible Do not remove the lithium battery gt OBE Your server contains the lithium battery Do not remove the battery Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Placing the lithium close to a fir
54. detected during POST See Error messages during POST for the information on the messages and the proper actions against the errors If an error message appears pressing F1 allows the BIOS setup utility to be started 7 When a password is set in the BIOS setup utility SETUP the screen prompting you to enter the password appears after the normal termination of POST The password can be entered for up to three times If you enter the password incorrectly all the time the server cannot be started In this case turn off the power of the server wait for about 10 seconds and then turn on the power to start the server again IMPORTANT Set the password only after OS is installed 8 Starts OS at the termination of POST General Description 2 31 POST Error Messages When POST detects an error it displays an error message on the display unit screen See Chapter 8 for POST error codes IMPORTANT Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your service representative Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance Power Off Follow the procedure below to power off the server If the power cord of the server is connected to a UPS refer to the manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls the UPS IMPORTANT Always allow POST to complete before turning off the server Shut down the OS 2 Press the POWER switch on the front of the server The POWER SLEEP lamp goes
55. en A E T T TA E 9 6 Foner ouppI y UD oeseri a T E E AT 9 11 Server Extending from the Rack Cabinet esseeeneeneseeeeseneneerennnessesrrrrrrrrrererrrrssrrrsrrrseesees 9 15 Front ACCESS COVED eeri aaa a a A E a EA 9 17 32370A Peripheral DEVICE persira i a i a a a E 9 18 Rear Acceess COVER anidan aa e A A a A 9 22 GCPUACCESS C OV Cl areni N a a E a use ScbseosGaietnes ott odeintens bee eowaeeans 9 23 PELDOT a ea a a ee a a a a ee aera 9 24 Memory Boald aces edt actin a a O a a 9 45 DUDA na a a aa a a a Meat ashes 9 47 Processor OA AIr DUC ennaa e a E a E Ea 9 54 Procossor Board teeri E ET 9 56 Processor CPU tease ee rane tates tae A 9 58 G10 A Ole alovorei HON nesia E a e Or one eee nee ne one wr ree Mer oer eater are aera 9 63 IDE Tniteri ag En ereeterten eer aE ea enon ete ee ace eee ener en eee te ee eee eee eee ee eeer 9 63 SCST TRUS ACS a agg aaa enti acacia Satna nc alas es meats e ee 9 64 Externa ko Col 2 cae eee ne me a ree a ee a NC ee 9 69 Sena IMETI Cais ile e T NE 9 71 Appendix A Specifications ccccceccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseseeeceeeeeesseeeeeeseaeeeaaeessaaeesonensonnens A 1 Appendix B Other Precautions iiecc cision ec erecta B 1 Transfer Rate of the On board LAN Controller ccccccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 1 Server Manage ement SOL are eret a E T N ns nlad ase B 1 Fonn fo qari ee etree est Peavy SO efi N e ee er ee B 1 CDROM ce dctnt ae at Sereda gear ecg i ae a eeloen s
56. features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts 3 Run PROSet exe in the following directory CD ROM DriveLetter WINNT W2K BC11 PROSet WIN2K The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Choose Typical and click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish oO a gt oY ae Restart the system Installing Windows 2000 E 9 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears Click Start menu Click Settings and Click Network Connections The Network Connections dialog box appears Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears 4 Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB 5 Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter When PROSet is installed 1 The Intel PROSet dialog box appears Click Start menu point to Settings and click Cont
57. following process 1 Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and reboot the system Select Tools Select Off line Maintenance Utility Select System Information Management Set a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Gee 3 ae Ee Select Save 3 38 Setting Up Your Server This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server This chapter describes Basic Input Output System BIOS configuration When you install the server for the first time or install remove optional devices thoroughly read this chapter for better understanding and correct setups SYSTEM BIOS SETUP The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server This utility is pre installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best conditions Thus you don t need to use the SETUP utility in most cases However you might wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below IMPORTANT m The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use only m The SETUP utility allows you to set a password The server is provided with two levels of password Supervisor and User With the Supervisor password you can view and change all system parameters of the SETUP utility With the User password system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited m
58. frame tips on the slide rail assembly are contact to the rectangular hole frames of the rack properly and the four screw holes of the rail can be seen through the mating rectangular holes of the rack m Check that the slide rail assembly is located to the level 12 Fasten the screws loosen in step 9 to fix the slide bracket 3 Q o S Q 13 Install the other slide rail assembly on the left side of the rack in the same procedure as that described by steps 9 to 12 above NOTE Make sure that the slide rail assembly is installed at the same level as the other slide rail assembly already installed For installing the server to the rack that has distance between the mount faces at the front and rear faces of the rack being 743 mm or longer fix the slide rail assembly and arm stopper together with two screws C In this case washers A is not necessary Setting Up Your Server 3 15 14 Hold the server by more than one person to mount it on the rack 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details m Do not lift the server only by a single person m Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component m Do not push the release lever with fingers Insert the rails on the side faces of the server into the slide rail assemblies securely and then push the server slowly a
59. in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run PROSet exe in the following directory CD ROM DriveLetter WINNT DOTNET BC11 PROSet WS03XP32 The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Choose Typical and click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish 2 Ot oe oh Restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 13 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 4 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears The procedure in the case of the standard start menu 1 Click Start menu Click Control Panel Click Network Connections and Click Local Area Connection The procedure in the case of the classic start menu 1 Click Start menu Click Settings and Click Network Connections The Network Connections dialog box appears 2 Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same
60. install optional mass storage driver see Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Configuration Diskette Creator in Chapter 6 to create setup inf file BIOS Specification Before installing Windows 2000 confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct On BIOS specification there are some items to specify for the new functions provided from Windows 2000 Plug and Play support for USB interface and so on See Chapter 4 to specify them 5 22 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Windows 2000 Express Setup can install Windows 2000 operating system However note the following issue IMPORTANT Before starting the installation complete all the process of adding the optional device and the setup of Express server mainframe BIOS and optional board specification m The document for installing Windows 2000 is also attached to the other software package which is sold separately from NEC but refer to this document when you install Windows 2000 on this model m After completing Express Setup see Setup for Solving Problems described later to specify the settings for trouble recovery such as Specifying Memory Dump Installing on the Mirrored Volume If you want to install Windows 2000 on the volume that is mirrored using Disk Management invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk and valid the mirroring again after the installation has completed Cr
61. install the PCI board with the PCI hot plug Select Advanced PCI Configuration Hot Plug PCI Control Minimum Middle Maximum The setting varies depending on the PCI board subject to the hot plug See the table below Ncode Board name Setting Value N8104 85F 100BASE TX Adapter N8104 103F 1000BASE T Adapter Select Advanced PCI Configuration Hot Plug PCI Control Empty Bus Default Speed PCI Slots 5 6 PCI Slots 7 8 and set the frequency of the boards to be installed If the hot plugs are provided for PCI Slot 5 6 or PCI Slot 7 8 previously set the speeds of the slots to meet those of the boards to be installed Saving the Configuration Data To save the BIOS configuration data Select Exit Exit Saving Changes or Save Changes To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data Select Exit Exit Discarding Changes or Discard Changes To resume the default BIOS configuration data may differ from factory set value Select Exit Load Setup Defaults To save the current value as user default Select Exit Save Custom Defaults To load the user defined default Select Exit Load Custom Defaults Configuring Your Server 4 9 Menu and Parameter Descriptions The SETUP utility has the following six major menus m Main m Advanced m Security m Server Boot m Exit To set minute functions select a submenu from the above menus The following describes available f
62. installed SETUP utility you can set desired passwords to protect the data stored in the server against access from unauthorized users When you forget the passwords however you may want clear them The following describes how to clear these passwords You can also use the following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server IMPORTANT Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory set configuration data To clear passwords or the CMOS data use the jumper switch on the baseboard of the server The following describe the clearing procedure A WARNING K Do not disassemble repair or alter the server AN Never attempt to disassemble repair or alter the server on any occasion other than described in this manual Failure to follow this instruction may cause an AN electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server Record the current BIOS settings Power off the server and unplug the power cord Extend the server from the rack cabinet Remove the rear access cover from the server see Chapter 9 Remove the CPU access cover from the server see Chapter 9 a ot ges Se ee T Change the desired jumper switch setting IMPORTANT Do not change any other switch settings Any change may cause the server to fail or malfunction m Use the clip over jumper pins pins 1 and 2 on the baseboard m Do not lose the clip 4 46 Configuring Your Server The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location
63. is not displayed correctly but the setup information can be displayed correctly The Point to Point tunneling protocol cannot be set The protocol is not supported at present After installation set the protocol through Control Panel In this case rebooting is not necessary The details of a network adapter cannot be set Configuration Diskette Creator is unable to set the details of network adapters Start Windows 2000 and set the details through Control Panel 8 38 Troubleshooting COLLECTING EVENT LOG This section describes on how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server IMPORTANT If STOP error system error or stall occurred follow the procedure below after restarting the system NOTE The different revision processor may be mixed in additional CPU kit When Windows 2000 is used following message may be appeared in the System Log of the Event Viewer after extension the different revision of two or more CPUs in the NEC Express server If this message is logged it is no problem for operation 2x Event Date 7 3 2001 Source Application Popup t Time 13 38 Category None Type Information EventID 41 User N A Computer SERVER 1 Description The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of the least capable processor in the system Should problems occur with
64. make the reinstallation from the first step 19 Pull out or push the server into the rack for several times to confirm that the slides move smoothly 20 Fix the server to the rack with four screws C and four washers A O 800 P sof he 50S Sao Sa SS Sasso SSeS Sc 5 a a a a eee Ja 5 ooo SS Sas SoS fo ome Screws C and Washers A Setting Up Your Server 3 21 21 Install the front bezel Now the installation is completed 3 22 Setting Up Your Server Removal Procedure More than one person should remove the server from the rack 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details AA AA S Do not lift the server only by a single person Do not pinch your fin
65. mass storage device before setting the server 2 Ifthe mass storage device is disk array controller configure the RAID system before running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 3 Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM a When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears check Use Existing Array b Check Apply OEM FD for Mass storage device 5 Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive Continue the ExpressSetup referring to messages displayed on the display Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 21 Microsoft Windows 2000 This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft Windows 2000 in the server Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation NOTE If you install Windows 2000 without using Express Setup see Appendix D Installation Notice This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation in order to install Windows 2000 correctly Supported OS on this model The server supports the following edition m Microsoft Windows 2000 Server version Described as Windows 2000 from now on m Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server version Described as Windows 2000 from now on On installing other OS contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver To
66. memory board Open the levers at both sides of the socket from which you remove the DIMM 1 The DIMM is unlocked and ready for removal 2 Reinstall all parts removed in Steps to 5 Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 8 Start the SETUP and select Advanced Memory Configuration gt Memory Retest Enabled to clear the error information of the removed DIMM See Chapter 4 for details Select Yes for Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details Upgrading Your Server 9 51 Memory Mirroring Online Spare Memory Feature The server provides the memory mirroring and online spare memory features To use either of these features install standby memory boards in the server and select the desired feature from the BIOS setup operation NOTES To enable memory mirroring online spare memory feature memory boards in DIMM group 1 and 3 must be the same capacities and type Contact your service representative if you need to use these features Memory Mirroring Feature The memory mirroring feature places a memory group as spare memory in standby state If the current memory group encounters an uncorrectable error the memory mirroring feature switches to the s
67. mgr_I99H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 14 2000 03 09 PM cae Stat teASecurity mgr_I99H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 14 2000 02 34 PM las Managers TedServer Recov mgr_199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 14 2000 02 32 PM a TAE DeRps mgr _199H27 19927 140 0 0 27 02 09 2000 02 46 PM oat Factory j DaRPS mgr_199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 09 2000 02 46 PM lAN Broncht DaRPS mgr_199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 09 2000 02 46 PM W San Fancisco Dares mgr_199H27 19927 140 0 0 27 02 09 2000 02 46 PM a H eyed TERPS mgr_I99H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 09 2000 02 45 PM t l New_York taJTemperature mgr _199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 09 2000 02 45 PM eat Miami taJTemperature mgr _199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 09 2000 02 44 PM ji 2 APAN mgr _199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 09 2000 02 34 PM I Nei dct mgr_I99H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 08 34 PM an Lower Limit mgr_I99H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 08 33 PM Jetwork Warning t INetwork mgr _199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 07 50 PM TERPS mgr _199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 06 14 PM PowerUnit Reco T2IRPS mgr _199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 06 14 PM Power Supply Error T JRPS mgr _199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 06 14 PM Power Supply Error TARPS mgr _199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 06 14 PM an Lower Limit taJFan mgr_199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 06 09 PM an Lower Limit taJFan mgr_199H27 199H27 140 0 0 27 02 08 2000 06 09 PM 5 Be PE Yen Tee ie 46 tems 42yguceod lil informatoni Finer MN Raor Har
68. of the chassis until the cover tabs fully engage the chassis slots 3 Attach the cover to the chassis with the three screws removed earlier 9 18 Upgrading Your Server 5 25 inch Peripheral Device The server has one slot for installing a backup device such as a magnetic tape drive s Wa D O 8000 Pio KK CIE Ddo oO Ic gt ima gt a SSS Con eum om ome oom ome foe eee ou a 03 as a exes a pa T a a gt C Xe IC oul amm CDC oul eum p amp aus que cums aa D amp GED GED ooo E e a a oes omen eee _ a a C IC om eum JC e a au aun aun lt ous qu Gump eum eum e j a LUA wN ac gt ac lt gt ac gt SSS ao ao D 5 25 inch device bay Installation Considerations The server can contain a single height SCSI device or IDE device m SCSI device Set SCSI IDs to IDO ID6 when you connect the device with the Ultra 320 B connector on the baseboard The termination setting should be invalid IDE device Connect the IDE device t
69. on the rear edge of the cover 4 Reinstall the removed components Upgrading Your Server 9 23 CPU Access Cover The CPU access cover provides access to the electronics bay that contains PCI add in cards and the server board set such as a memory board processor board 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 A to 1 8 for details Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed Removal 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Pull out the server from the rack 3 Remove the rear access cover 4 Loosen the two captive screws located on the front of the CPU access cover 5 Lift the end of the cover where the screws are located and remove the cover AAW A _Y Installation Follow these steps to install the CPU access cover Orient the access cover with the captive screws toward the front of the server Insert the tabs on the rear of the cover into the slots at the rear of the chassis Press down gently and tighten the captive screws at the front of the cover e I S Reinstall the removed components 9 24 Upgrading Your Server PCI Board The server contains eight slots into which PCI boards can be inserted Some PCI boards support the hot plug function by which they may be installed or removed
70. on the rear of the server with two screws B Drive two screws B to the rear of the server and the adapter bracket temporarily insert the groove of the cable arm to the screws and securely fasten the screws driven temporarily Cable arm Setting Up Your Server 3 17 16 Install the arm bracket on the mount face at the rear of the rack or the slide rail assembly Mount face Mount face NOTE Two types of arm brackets are provided to be fit to any distance between the front and rear mount faces of the rack Use arm bracket 700 if the distance between the front and rear mount faces of the rack is 700 or 743 mm Use arm bracket 900 for the rack having the depth of 760 or 900 mm m For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 700 or 743 mm Fix the arm bracket 700 to the core nuts installed on the mount face of the rear of the rack with two screws C OO Core nut installation position OOOUOUU Arm bracket 700 3 18 Setting Up Your Server m For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear faces of the rack being 760 mm Fix arm bracket 900 to the screw holes nearest to the rear face among the rear holes on the slide rail assembly using two screws D Arm bracket 900 m For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear faces of the rack being 900 mm Fix arm bracket 900 to the screw holes ne
71. or thinner Keep the CD ROM in a CD ROM case when not in use Tape Media The following describes data handling with the DAT DLT or AIT optionally available for the Server Saving your valuable data When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape you should save them into two cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error as well as to protect your valuable data and programs from loss Three generation data management NEC recommends that you should employ three generation data management for data storage Three generation data management uses three cartridge tapes A B and C You save data to tape A on the first day tape B on the second day tape C on the third day tape A on the forth day and so on That is you save data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape A through C Other Precautions B 5 This enables you for example to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read error Also when both tapes B and C make a read error you can restore your valuable data by using the data stored in tape A Keyboard The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols IMPORTANT m Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the keyboard Doing so may cause a failure of the keyboard m The keyboard provided with the server i
72. place Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not carry or install the server only by a single person Do not install the server where the load may be concentrated on a specific point Do not install any component on the server only by a single person Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack Do not provide the wiring exceeding the rating power 3 4 Setting Up Your Server Before you begin the rack installation review the following guidelines Do Not Locate a rack in a narrow space that would inhibit devices from being pulled out from the rack completely Locate the rack on a floor that cannot bear the total weight of the rack and devices mounted in the rack Locate the rack in a place where stabilizers cannot be installed or where the rack can be installed only after proper earthquake resistant 1s constructed Locate the rack on an uneven or slanting floor Locate the rack in an area that has drastic temperature change near a heater air conditioner or refrigerator Locate the rack where intense vibration may be generated Locate the rack where corrosive gases sulfur dioxide hydrogen sulfide nitrogen dioxide chlorine ammonia ozone etc exist And also locate it in the
73. place any object on top of the server Only an authorized NEC service technician can remove the cooling fans from the server 1 12 Notes on Using Your Server FOR PROPER OPERATION Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server Use of the server ignoring the notes will cause malfunctions or failures of the server Install the server in a place that meets requirements for successful operation For details see Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server Do not delete the hard disk partition exclusively provided for maintenance of the server although it may appear on the OS Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the server and peripheral devices Verify that the access lamp on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting the floppy disk The server management logic on your system board monitors and logs system voltage changes When plugging the power cord to the system you may experience 10 seconds delay from the time you press the POWER switch on the front panel This is normal system operation and is required by the server management logic When you have just turned off the server wait at least 30 seconds before turning it back on Do not turn off the server until characters following the NEC logo appears on the screen Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server Some software includes a command
74. specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter When PROSet is installed 1 5 The Intel PROSet dialog box appears Click Start menu point to Settings and click Control Panel Double click Intel R PROSet on the Control Panel window Click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Speed and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex Settings value the same as the value specified for HUB Click Apply and click OK Specify the other network driver with the same progress above NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setup for Trouble Process later in this document 5 32 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Optional Network Board Driver If you want to utilize optional Network Board N8104 80 86 103 111 113 confirm the versions of driver in EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and the version of driver attached to the Network board CD ROM Drive Letter WINNT W2K BC11 PRO1000 WIN2K e1000nt5 sys CD ROM Drive Letter WINNT W2K BC11 PRO100 WIN2K e100bnt5 sys If the driver attached to the Network board is old install the driver stored in NEC EXPRESSBUIL
75. status indications The on screen CPU numbers and socket locations on the baseboard are associated as shown in the following figure To clear the CPU error information Select Main Processor Settings Processor Retest Yes and reboot POE SPE alias hic Processor CPU 4 Processor CPU 2 Processor CPU 1 Configuring Your Server 4 7 Security To set passwords on the BIOS Select Security Set Supervisor Password and enter a password Supervisor password and User password can be set separately and only User password has a restriction to access to SETUP utility To enable disable the POWER switch and DUMP switch m To disable Select Security Power Switch Inhibit Enabled m To enable Select Security Power Switch Inhibit Disabled IMPORTANT Enabling Power Switch Inhibit disables forced shutdown see Chapter 8 as well as power on off using the POWER switch To set the secure mode Select Security Secure Mode and set each item External Devices To set up external devices Select Advanced I O Device Configuration and set up each device Internal Devices To set up internal PCI devices of the server Select Advanced PCI Configuration and set up each device To clear the hardware configuration data after installing removing internal devices Select Advanced Reset Configuration Data Yes 4 8 Configuring Your Server PCI Hot Plug To
76. switch at least 4 seconds IMPORTANT If the remote power on function is used cycle the power once to load the OS and turn off the power again in the normal way 8 48 Troubleshooting This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server procedures for install or removing such optional devices and notes on using them IMPORTANT Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by any user However NEC does not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user NEC recommends you ask your service representative for install or removing any optional devices m Make sure to use only optional devices and cables authorized by NEC Repair of the server due to malfunctions failures or damage resulted from installing inappropriate devices or cables will be charged m When you made any change to the hardware configuration make sure to update the system see Chapter 5 for details 9 2 Upgrading Your Server SAFETY NOTES Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly 4A WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not disas
77. the Setup File name to use during the installation NOTE If there is any problem that can not be modified in the Setup File you selected the message to set another Configuration Diskette appears In such case confirm the floppy disk you inserted After the Setup File is specified the message Do you want to review or modify the Setup File parameters is displayed 2 Ifyou want to edit the information file click Review If you do not want to edit the information file and continue the installation click Skip Click Review Go to step 8 Click Skip Go to step 9 Using Blank disk 1 Click the box under Setup File Name A or press A The input box appears 2 Input the file name Operating System to Install appears The OS supported by the computer is displayed in the list 3 Select Windows Server 2003 you want to install from the list box Confirm the contents specified during OS installation If Disk Array Controller Board is connected to Express server mainframe the Configure RAID screen appears Confirm the specification modify if necessary and then click Next Next Basic Information screen appears Confirm the specification modify if necessary and then click Next Supported Computer shown in the screen differs according to the model After that click Next Back or Help on the screen to continue Modify the specification each time if necessary 5 10 Installing the Operating
78. the check of Use Default Settings and check the RESET of Activate Select the Open Remote Console command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button on the server name to start the MWA Remote Console MWA Remote Console LAN192 168 1 249 ServerA Not connected _ OW x File View Data Window Help HI fee LAN192 1689 1 249 ServerA Not connected LAN 92 168 1 245 servers Select the Action at Remote Console Connect command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button on the server window to display the Action at RomPilot Connect dialog box Then select Go MWA mode Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Insert the floppy disk storing the configuration information file into the floppy disk drive 12 13 14 15 Installing and Using Utilities 6 23 Turn off the power of the server and then on again to restart the system After a single reboot MWA Remote Console displays the main menu of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and you can operate tools on the server through the management PC NOTE The main menu appears without rebooting it when the setting in the configuration information file is already established When the main menu appears on the screen of the management PC remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive Select the Properties command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right mouse bu
79. with error taken off line The CPU is degraded Contact your 0B51 Processor 2 with error taken offline service representative 0B52 Processor 3 with error taken offline 0B53 Processor 4 with error taken offline 0B5F Forced to use Processor with error Because an error is detected in every CPU the system is forcibly started Contact your service representative 0B60 DIMM group 1 has been disabled Contact your service representative 0B61 DIMM group 2 has been disabled 0B62 DIMM group 3 has been disabled reading A fan failure or fan clogging may occur Contact your service representative to request the maintenance Contact your service representative reading 0B75 System voltage out of the range The error occurred during fan sensor reading module confirmation replace the power supply unit 0B7D The normal operation can t be guaranteed with Contact you service representative to add an use of only one PSU additional power supply unit or replace the existing power supply unit Turn off the power once and then on again to start the server If the error cannot be e e a ene SREE OB8A BMC SEL area full OB8B BMC progress check timeout OB8C BMC command access failed OB8F Could not redirect the console BMC Parameter Error OB90 BMC Platform Information Area corrupted BMC update firmware corrupted Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted All the commands and functions other than the FRU c
80. with the power of the server being on Your server supports the hot plug function The PCI boards supporting the hot plug function only include the N8104 111 1OOBASE TX Adapter and the N8103 103 1000BASE T Adapter IMPORTANT m The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the PCI board Do not touch the PCI board terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place the PCI board directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures Be sure any empty expansion slots have a slot cover installed An Open expansion slot reduces the cooling and EMI integrity of the server and can affect performance and cause damage due to overheating NOTE The tab on the PCI board slot indicates hot plug or non hot plug by its color Hot plug slot has the green tab PCI slot 5 through 8 and non hot plug slot has the blue tab PCI slot 1 through 4 Slot number Lamps for hot plug PCI board slots 5 to 8 mw CIN Gil i o Non hot plug PCI board slots Nai Al color blue fa Hot plug PCI board slots color green PCI 1 2 1st PCI bus 32 bit 33MHz 5V PCI PCI 3 4 3rd PCI bus 64 bit 100MHz 3 3V PCI X PCI 5 6 4th PCI bus 64 bit 100MHz 3 3V PCI X hot plug PCI 7 8 5th PCI bus 64 bit 100MH
81. 2 For the procedure for starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with Remote Console refer to Chapter 6 MWA Remote Management Configuration for the Server without console IMPORTANT Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu in BIOS SETUP NEC EXPRESSBUILDER cannot be used if the CD ROM drive is not the first device to launch the system To use this feature you need 3 5 inch floppy disk Please prepare the floppy disk Installing and Using Utilities 6 11 NOTE The following items of BIOS setup information will be set as shown below Main Menu LAN Controller 1 10 100 Serial Port A Base I O address Interrupt Serial Port B Base I O address Interrupt Serial Port Address Baud Rate Flow Control Console Type Enabled Enabled 3F8 IRQ 4 Enabled 2F8 On board COM B CTS RTS PC ANSI 6 12 Installing and Using Utilities Shown below are the main menu items m Setup Automatically sets up the server m Tools Launch the features of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER individually m Help Help message on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER m Quit Quit NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Setup The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER checks the hardware configuration of the server The disk array and maintenance partition are automatically configured L RAID Cont i guration Pea ee erence ari bom luneale Tools When you select the Tools on the Main Menu the following sc
82. 20 sscssuscdsadadeasansua lt dsaeeweesaaaadcbadeeabeaspaans lt dhdesageavexesdebsaeeabeooonnne 8 39 Collecting Dr Watson Diagnostic Information cccccccccccccccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 40 Memor Dump sareei evan ee AE aenenoete 8 40 Preparing tot Memory Dumipine ieiet a a a a ecbacSeaeetetens 8 40 Savine the DOMP NS seeiis ia a A a Sune abianae ied tade sae 8 41 Recovery Lor WINdows 2 O00 mesrine a a a a 8 42 ON Eine Mamtenance Utili queememeeneneene eee ter mene teeter cn terete corer aren terete nen meer mes terran arte nner Fetes 8 44 Starine the Off line Maintenance Dy id iiss seterseraleh sais a ld Sate eceinmsak esd asres 8 45 Features of Off line Maintenance Utility cc cccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 46 Resetino te SENEE ci aaa lech a i Sa a cl i leaden he Coed all 8 47 JSG he lt 6 Hew wD CG 6 h 9 0 aa eg cn Se ore ee ann nt Sue ete ne nee en E 8 47 Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server ccscccceesseeeeeseeeeseeseeeseesneeeeeeneeeeesseeeeasneesseeneessoes 9 1 SAY NOLS nee ne eee een Ree eT ee eee ee 9 2 POAUIASLALIC Measures ireira E T T ETE 9 3 Preparing for Installation and Removal yei0icx1c schesvansGavsaseweeasndeencaatsadnadedoalmodevs acuwansdtoacactanansanedes 9 4 Tool andoupp hies Necdeds isnan ehen rT E e a eels 9 5 Device Installation or Removal Procedure cccesesesseeseseeseeessssssesessssssssssssssssssssssssesesesseaaaas 9 6 HADISE DIVE
83. 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards Win2000 and press Enter Then it returns to the screen of step 5 Installing Windows 2000 E 7 Ifthe optional board is installed select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear For details refer to Getting Started After installation is completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Driver Installation and Advanced Settings and Updating the System of this manual E 8 Installing Windows 2000 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section please refer to the document attached to the driver PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these
84. 2F disk expansion unit can contain up to 14 hard disk drives The cabinet is exclusively used for the server The server with the installation of the disk array controller board can connect with up to 16 disk expansion unit see the manual of the disk expansion unit for details IMPORTANT The disk expansion unit does not contain hard disk drives Purchase them additionally To connect the server with the N8141 32F disk expansion unit any of the optional cables listed below is required m K410 93 01 expansion unit connection SCSI cable m K410 93 03 expansion unit connection SCSI cable m K410 93 06 expansion unit connection SCSI cable After connecting the server with the disk expansion unit set the disk expansion unit to the disk array configuration using the Disk Array Configuration Utility See Chapter 6 for details of the setting and the procedure For the disk expansion unit with the disk array configuration the auto rebuild feature provided by the disk array controller board allows the data defected due to failure of any hard disk installed in the disk expansion units to be recovered replace the defected disk with a new one in the power on status hot swap feature Upgrading Your Server 9 69 External SCSI Cable To connect the external SCSI device with the server remove the cable for 5 25 inch device from Ultra 320 SCSI B connector and connect the external SCSI cable coming with the server The connection procedure is de
85. 5 000 rpm Ultra 320 N8150 165F 36 3 GB 15 000 rpm Ultra 320 N8150 172F 73 2 GB 15 000 rpm Ultra 320 m To make array configuration refer to the manual that comes with the optional disk array controller board All five slots may contain a hard disk approximately 25 4 mm 1 inch high The SCSI IDs of IDO through ID4 are always assigned to hard disks as shown below l O O80 O00 O il L O vii SCSI ID4 ever SCSI ID3 SCSI p2 SCS ID1 The 3 5 in disk bay is connected to the Ultra 320 SCSI A connector on the baseboard when the server is shipped To use the hard disk drives in a disk array configuration reconnect the cable from the connector on the baseboard to the disk array controller connector In the disk array configuration use the same model of hard disk drives A dummy tray or dummy sponge is installed in the 3 5 inch disk bay The purpose of a dummy tray or dummy sponge is to increase the cooling effect in the server Install a dummy tray or dummy sponge block in slots not containing a hard disk drive IMPORTANT Use the appropriate dummy tray
86. 5 27 Using the specified Configuration Diskette The Setup File included in Configuration Diskette will be displayed 4 Select the Setup File name to use during the installation NOTE If there is any problem that can not be modified in the Setup File you selected the message to set another Configuration Diskette appears In such case confirm the floppy disk you inserted After the Setup File is specified the message Do you want to review or modify the Setup File parameters is displayed 5 If you want to edit the information file click Yes If you do not want to edit the information file and continue the installation click Skip Click Yes Go to step 8 Click Skip Go to step 9 Using Blank disk 6 Click the box under Setup File Name A or press A The input box appears 7 Input the file name Operating System to Install appears The OS supported by the computer is displayed in the list 8 Select Windows 2000 you want to install from the list box Confirm the contents specified during OS installation If Disk Array Controller Board is connected to Express server mainframe the Configure RAID screen appears Confirm the specification modify if necessary and then click Next Next Basic Information screen appears Confirm the specification modify if necessary and then click Next Supported Computer shown in the screen differs according to the model After that click Next
87. 88 Oo D i D o 0 O i O Oo D 0 D 0 o AE aa a EBE a a H z a i a a a a o o o O o m o o o O O O O QO O Bju 5 VJS A z 5 V A V 5 ViB co AC Standby lamps SB1 and SB2 lamps go on T Power on the server The POWER lamp on the power supply units goes on When the server is redundant power supply configuration AC_R lamp on the front of the server goes on 8 Confirm by the STATUS lamp or on the POST diagnostic screen that there are no errors related to the power supply units See Chapter 8 for details on the error messages If the POWER lamps are off reinstall the power supply units If the POWER lamps are still off contact your sales representative Upgrading Your Server 9 13 Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit Replace only a failing power supply unit IMPORTANT Do not remove a power supply unit operating normally NOTE If one power supply unit fails while the server contains three power supply units in a redundant configuration the failing power supply unit can be replaced with the system operating power on state Skip step 2 1 Check the POWER lamp on the power supply unit and determine which unit needs to be replaced The lamp of the failing power supply unit is off Shutdown the system and turn off the server Loosen the captive screw that retains the power supply unit While pressing down on the locking tab grasp the handle and careful
88. B 8 Setting Up Your Server 3 13 9 Loosen the three screws with which the slide bracket of the slide rail assemble is fixed This step is required to match the length of the slide rail assembly with the depth of the rack distance between the front and rear supports If the three screws are loosened the slide bracket may be slid in the front or rear direction Screws 10 Locate the slide rail assembly on the right side of the rack frame at the position defined by the template Stamp of two circles placed in 5U Q Stamp located at the upper right position of screw hole Q Screw hole U bUn LELU L Ua NOTES m Check the direction of installing the slide rail assembly Make the bracket face facing the outside of the rack Locate the side with the slide bracket at the rear of the rack m The front and rear supports of the rack have rectangular holes for screw fastening For the NEC rack round stamps are provided in 1U As shown in the figure locate the slide rail assembly so that a stamp is positioned at the upper right of the top screw hole of the slide rail assembly 3 14 Setting Up Your Server 11 Fix the slide rail assembly with four screws C two on each of the front and rear sides and four washers A two on each of the front and rear sides WERT WWW Jaan VOE S8 GGA NOTES m Make sure that the
89. B3 Incorrect Drive B type run SETUP error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 8 16 Troubleshooting Error code Error message Recommended Action 02D0 System cache error Cache disabled The cache cannot be used Contact your service representative 02D1 System Memory exceeds the CPU s caching limit Contact your service representative 02F5 DMA Test Failed Expansion ROM not initialized PCI Slot 04 0504 Expansion ROM not initialized PCI Slot 05 Expansion ROM not initialized PCI Slot 06 Expansion ROM not initialized PCI Slot 08 0615 COM B configuration changed 0616 COM B config error device disabled 0617 Floppy configuration changed Contact your service representative 0619 Parallel port configuration changed 061A Parallel port config error device disabled OBOO Rebooted during BIOS boot at Post Code 0B1B PCI System Error on Bus Device Function 0B1C PCI Parity Error on Bus Device Function Make sure that the server supports the CPU Processor 1 If you are not sure contact your service representative to request the maintenance Processor 2 Unsupported Processor detected on Processor 3 Processor 4 A fan failure or fan clogging may occur Fan 2 Alarm occurred Contact your service representative to a a a Troubleshooting 8 17 Error sod Error message Recommended Action 0B50 Processor 1
90. D ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Create Support Disk from Tools Select Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Create Support Disk menu D 4 Installing Windows Server 2003 Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Create from Master Control Menu Master Control Menu runs on the following operating systems Windows Server 2003 Windows 2000 Windows Me 98 95 Windows NT 4 0 Windows XP You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Master Control Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Run Windows Me 98 95 or Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4 0 Windows XP Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Master Control Menu will appear Click on Setup with left mouse button and click Make OEM DISK and then for Windows Server 2003 NOTE You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click Insert the flo
91. DER CD ROM Refer to the re installation procedure described Appendix E Network Driver for N8104 103 113 CD ROM Drive Letter WINNT W2K BC11 PRO1000 WIN2K Network Driver for N8104 80 86 111 CD ROM Drive Letter WINNT W2K BC11 PRO100 WIN2K Graphics Accelerator Driver Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board follow the document attached to the board to install the driver 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run Setup exe in the following directory lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT W2K VIDEO setup exe 4 Follow the message to continue the installation If the dialog message Digital Signature could not been found appears select Yes to continue 5 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive follow the direction on the screen and restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 33 Installing SCSI Controller Driver If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 65F 75 install it according to the following procedure 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management Double click the SCSI Contro
92. EC Installing a third party DIMM may cause a failure of the DIMM as well as the server Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from installing such a board will be charged DIMM group 3 2I DIMM group 3 DIMM group 2 s DIMM group 2 DIMM group 1 gt __ DIMM group 1 ie 9 48 Upgrading Your Server Installation Install a DIMM in the following procedure IMPORTANT Install four additional DIMMs for each group because the server uses interleaved memory If DIMMs of different specifications are installed in a group the server does not operate normally DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows Example Frequency of 200 MHz buffered capacity of 128 MB raw address of 12 bits column address of 10 bits and single side 200 B 128 R12 C10 S Single side Column address Raw address Capacity Buffered Frequency See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover Remove the memory board Locate the DIMM group which you are going to install DIMMs Dh 4 OP ee ey as S Open the levers at both ends of the socket 1 IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the lever do not apply an excess force to the lever 8 Push the DIMM straight into the socket 2 IMPORTANT Use extreme care when installing a DIMM Applying too m
93. Enter the password Up to three password entries will be accepted If you fail to enter the password correctly for three consecutive times the server halts You can no longer proceed Power off the server NOTE The server is provided with two levels of password Supervisor and User With the Supervisor password you can view and change all system parameters With the User password system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited Configuring Your Server 4 3 Description on On Screen Items and Key Usage Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility Key functions are also listed at the bottom of the screen Indicates the current menu Setup item menu Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced System Time System Date Legacy Floppy A Legacy Floppy B Indicates there are submenus Hard Disk Pre delay gt Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Slave Item Specific Help 16 19 20 01 10 2002 Select the display 1 44 1 25Mb 3 5 language for the BIOS Disabled Disabled CD ROM None Online help window Processor Settings Language Fl Help Esc Exit Select Menu English US Select Item Change Values Enter Select Sub Menu F9 Setup Defaults F10 Save and Exit Parameter high lights upon selection menu Explanation of key functions Cursor Cursor and Enter Esc F1 F9 F10 Sele
94. Express Setup Prepare Configuration Diskette You can operate the installation if you do not have Configuration Diskette specified in advance but one floppy disk formatted by MS DOS 1 44MB is necessary also in such case For Configuration Diskette use the blank disk in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER package or prepare other floppy disk personally IMPORTANT Ifyou modified the system configuration execute System Update m If you want to modify or add Graphics Accelerator Driver or the drivers of Network Adapter and so on see Appendix D Turn the power of peripheral device on and then turn on the server Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty ee ween foe Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts 5 Click Express Setup Note will be displayed 6 Read the instruction carefully and click OK The message Insert Configuration Diskette appears 7 Insert Configuration Diskette into floppy disk drive and click OK floppy disk formatted by 1 44MB into the floppy disk drive and click OK Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 9 Using the specified Configuration Diskette The Setup File included in Configuration Diskette will be displayed 1 Select
95. Firmware Rev BMC BBFirmware Rev Rev IPMI Rev the version of Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI supported by BMC S Rev ea the revision of SDR Sensor Record Display only i Rev Indicates the revision of PIA Display only Primary HSBP Rev Indicates the revision of the primary HSBP Hot Swap Back Plane board normally installed Display only Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 31 Console Redirection Selecting Console Redirection on the Server menu shows the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Server Console Redirection Item Specific Help Serial Port Address Disabled If enabled it will ACPI Redirection Port Disabled use a port on the motherboad Baud Rate 9600 Flow Control CTS RTS CD Console Type VT 100 Remote Console Reset Disabled Fi Help t Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit gt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit See the table below for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting Serial Port Disabled Selects the port to be used as the Address On Board Com A redirection port The parameters On Board Com B specified in I O device configuration submenu is used as address and interrupt ACPI Redirection Disabled Specify the I O port address or Port On Board ComA interrupt level used in ACPI headless On Board Com B console redirection
96. I Slots 5 6 or PCI Slots 7 8 Transfer speed of the board to be installed gt The driver of a PCI board cannot be stopped from the OS when Hot Remove or Hot Replace is executed for the PCI board Is another software using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to be executed If another software is using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to be executed the driver of the PCI board cannot be stopped Terminate the software then stop the driver of the PCI board If executing Hot Replace restart the software after having mounted a new PCI board 8 32 Troubleshooting Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM check the following _ Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server an error message will appear or the OS will boot L Is BIOS configuration correct The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server Use the BIOS setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from the CD ROM drive first lt Menu to check Boot gt l Is an error message appeared When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress the following message appears After this message appears check the error and take the appropriate corrective action according to the message list
97. In Windows Server 2003 the following message will be displayed if you use the operating system without executing the license authentication Select Yes and execute the procedure for license authentication Windows Product Activation This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can continue You cannot log on until you activate Windows Do you want to activate Windows now To shut down the computer click Cancel YES NO Cancel 8 30 Troubleshooting About System Log when re starting the system on Windows Server 2003 Type Warning Source E100B Event ID 4 Description Adapter Intel R PRO 100 Network Connection Adapter Link Down When re starting the system without connecting the network cable this log may be found in system event log But this has no effect on the behavior of LAN driver Confirm that the system is connected with the LAN cable properly If 100Base LAN port is not utilized disable 100Base LAN on device manager or disable it on BIOS configuration Then the log will not be registered Event logs in using SNMP Service in Windows Server 2003 Event Type Warning Event Source EvntAgnt Event Category None Event ID 1015 Description TraceLevel parameter not located in registry Default trace level used is 32 Event Type Warning Event Source EvntAgnt Event Category None Event ID 1003 Description TraceFileName parameter not located in registry Default trace fi
98. K Cancel Apply Upgrading Your Server 9 59 Installation Take the following steps to install the CPU nT eae Pe YS NOTE To clarify the explanation the duct of the retention may be omitted in the following figures See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover Remove the memory board Remove the processor board air duct Remove the processor board Locate the CPU socket which you are going to install CPU and remove the socket cover from the socket Raise the locking lever on the socket IMPORTANT Open the lever until it stops It can be opened to approx 120 degrees Retention 9 60 Upgrading Your Server 10 Aligning the pins of the CPU with the socket insert the CPU slowly and gently into the socket IMPORTANT Be aware of CPU direction Pin layouts on two corners among four differ from others to prevent an incorrect insertion Confirm the pin mark and pin layout on the socket and insert the CPU correctly Pin marks 11 Push the CPU lightly to the socket and push down the lever to secure the CPU 12 Put the heat sink on CPU Upgrading Your Server 9 61 13 Install the both heat sink clips as follows 1 Hook one end of the clip over the tab on the retention 2 Align the clip with the slot in the heat sink and press down on the center of th
99. Lithium battery 11 Power connector 12 Power connector 13 Floppy disk drive connector 14 Front panel board interface connector 15 IDE connector for CD ROM drive 16 Ultra320 B connector for 5 25 inch or external SCSI device 17 Ultra320 A connector for 3 5 inch hard disk bay 18 Cooling fan connector 19 Hot swap back plane HSBP Secondary connector 2 12 General Description Processor Board CPU1 socket the default processor is installed in this socket CPU2 socket the optional processor should be installed in this socket CPU3 socket the optional processor should be installed in this socket CPU4 socket the optional processor should be installed in this socket Baseboard interface connectors 1 2 3 4 5 6 Memory board interface connector General Description 2 13 Memory Board 1 DIMM socket The default DIMMs are installed in the sockets 1 to 4 The optional DIMMs should be installed in the sockets 5 to 12 To enable the online sparing memory mirroring feature see Chapter 9 DIMM 2 Processor board interface connector 2 14 General Description STANDARD FEATURES High performance m Intel Xeon Processor MP N8100 1023F 2 20GHZ 2MB N8100 1024F 3GHz 4MB m High speed memory access Supports PC 200 compliant registered ECC DDR DRAM mM High speed 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T interface 1000Mbps 100Mbps 10Mbps supported m High speed disk access Ultra320 SCSI
100. NEC N8100 1023F 1024F NEC Express5800 140Rc 4 User s Guide 1st Edition 10 2004 ONL 3107cN 140Rc4 100 99 0410 PROPRIETARY NOTICE AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMER The information disclosed in this document including all designs and related materials is the valuable property of NEC Corporation NEC and or its licensors NEC and or its licensors as appropriate reserve all patent copyright and other proprietary rights to this document including all design manufacturing reproduction use and sales rights thereto except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others The NEC product s discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product However actual performance of each such product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration customer data and operator control Since implementation by customers of each product may vary the suitability of specific product configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by NEC To allow for design and specification improvements the information in this document is subject to change at any time without notice Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without prior written approval of NEC is prohibited First Printing October 2004 Copyright 2004 NEC Corporation 7 1 Shiba 5 Chome Minato Ku Tokyo 108 8001 Japan All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan Keep this Us
101. NEC MWA MWA from the start menu on the management PC installed NEC MWA MWA will start and open Remote Control Manager 3 MWA Remote Control Manager OF x File Server Edit View Tools Help 4 2 Onja ts BQ P Ay Top Group IP Address Telep Insert a formatted floppy disk of 1 44 MB into the floppy disk drive of the management PC Select Configuration from the File menu of MWA Remote Control Manager to display the Configuration dialog box Select New to display the Select a model dialog box Check Write data to FD and select the model name to display the Configuration dialog box for the server Set and register the configuration information on the Configuration for BMC dialog box and then write the configuration information into the floppy disk with the following file name lt Configuration Information File name gt CSL_LESS cfg The setting items of the server are as follows Computer Name The managed server name Arbitrary IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary Alert Receiver IP address of management PC 6 22 Installing and Using Utilities 10 11 Select the Properties command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button on the server name to display the Properties dialog box If the Properties dialog box appears provide the following setting lt ID page gt Connection Type LAN lt Alert Notifications page gt Remove
102. NT To abort rebuilding power off the server In sucha case restart the server hot swap the failed hard disk and restart rebuilding Observe the following notes to use the auto rebuild feature Do not power off the server Ifthe server is powered off before rebuilding hard disks the auto rebuild feature will not start m When you removed a hard disk wait at least 90 seconds before installing the hard disk back again m Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is in progress AC Standby Lamp The power supply bay on the front of the server has the AC standby lamp m Default configuration If the power cord is connected to the AC inletl to supply AC power to the power supply unit the SB1 lamp goes on green m Redundant configuration If the power system of the server is in the redundant configuration with optional power supply unit and the power cords are connected to the AC inlet and AC inlet2 to supply AC power to the all power supply units the SB1 and SB2 lamp go on green After turning on the server the AC_R lamp also goes on green O 00 00 ill 0000 O 2 O O VUUUUUIUUVUJUUU UYU UU O O Saanaa lonann ena lienne y a UUUY O00 0 0 UUUUUU HUYJUUUUU UYU UU JUUU SA e JUU UUU UTU SUn uO vnn U VUNNI UUUU SB1 lamp sae AC Standby SB2 lamp
103. Next NOTE If you click on Cancel all the input value will be deleted When completing the specification of setup information the Save Setup Information dialog box will appear 5 Confirm that the Configuration Diskette check box is checked and input file name for Setup File in File Name save Setup Information me Configuration Diskette File Name Canal Help 6 Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1 44MB into the floppy disk drive and click on OK Now Configuration Diskette has been created Configuration Diskette is used when you install Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 Puta label and keep it where it will not be lost NOTE For the information on the contents of each specifying item refer to the Help If you want to modify the information file that already exists click Modify information Files on Configuration Diskette Creator window Refer to the Help to modify the inf file 6 18 Installing and Using Utilities Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver To install optional Mass Storage Driver that is supported by the Express Setup follow the procedure below to create Configuration Diskette 1 Display Configuration Diskette Creator window 2 From the File menu click Create new information files Disk Environment dialog box will be displayed 3 Specify each item and click on OK The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order such as Disk Environment dia
104. Normal start is to create the Configuration Diskette after starting the Express Setup NOTES m Use the blank disk in the accessory box to create Configuration Diskette m You can create Configuration Diskette in advance using Configuration Diskette Creator included in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER m If you create Configuration Diskette in advance you can abbreviate the items that is necessary to input or select during Express Setup You can also create or modify the setup information restored in Configuration Diskette during Express Setup Ifyou have a computer other than NEC Express servers that is running with Windows 95 98 Windows NT 3 51 or later or Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 we recommend you to edit setup information from the computer in advance using Configuration Diskette Creator For more information on how to create Configuration Diskette using Configuration Diskette Creator see Chapter 6 5 4 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Microsoft Windows Server 2003 This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft Windows Server 2003 in the server Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation NOTE If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup see Appendix D Installation Notice This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation in order to install Windows Server 2003 correctly Supported OS o
105. O Device Configuraion Menu gt Advanced Chipset Control Boot time Diagnostic Screen Disabled Reset Configuration Data No NumLock Off Memory Processor Error Boot Fl Help Select Item l Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit See the table below for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting Boot time Disabled Specify whether the self diagnosis POST Diagnostic Enabled running screen is displayed or not on booting Screen If this item is set to Disabled the NEC logo appears during POST Pressing Esc in the status causes the screen display to be switched to the POST execution screen The Boot time Diagnostic Screen is automatically enabled if the Console Redirection is enabled Reset No Select Yes to clear the extended system Configuration Yes configuration data area system information Data stored by POST The parameter is changed to No after the system is booted NumLock On Specify whether the numlock is enabled or Off disabled on booting the execution of POST When CPU error or Memory error is encountered the utility is not paused at the end of POST if this item is set to Halt and even though POST Error Pause of Server menu is Enabled Memory Boot Indicates whether POST is paused once at the Processor Error Halt occurrence of a CPU or memory error during Factory set Configu
106. OD i hile rer ene a nnn nee ry et nen een a ea a T 8 7 ACCESS Wr 1a 0 penne a eee ae ee eee ee ener R 8 7 Hard Disk Drive Lamp DISK Lamp ccccccccccccccscccscceccaccccccccceteneseectecesececcneseceteeeeeeeees 8 8 AC Stndby r 6 1 ponent nen me tte one a AE er eee Re ere ee ee eee eee 8 9 POW CL NSAI sossache ea aa astes aneestileamadsacecsu nl a aieawhi ene aieaiaanaeles ties araceies 8 10 LAN Ome Ctr Tiainip S sicce as tase certeesacsci a eau eae N Gee 8 11 PEESO Te iS datera a a a a a a Ganeaies 8 12 FAN Fault LIMP Seza a a a a a a 8 13 Eror WICSS A esee aa E AT wei ec E E N O 8 14 Error Me ssages after POWE ON ycctectceceiae ae e EAE cea es N e 8 14 POST ENO MES ib nn E E A E ae ee A 8 15 BEPC Odes e E AA EE AO O E A E A 8 21 SOby 1S PODIE eesin a A R E aa e 8 22 Problems WAU SEL V CL eraen a a a e 8 22 Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ernaia rnn EEEE Eaa 8 32 Probleme Witi LESS SED oeaan or a E EE EE NEA 8 33 Error Message during Disk Array Configuration ccccccccccccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 36 Problems with Master Control Menu cccccccccccccccessseeeeessnnneeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssseessssnaeeeeeeeseeeeees 8 36 Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator ccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 37 Colle cine Even Lof soit 8 ccs oe piace tease diee aeeteseteace di eenverassd ae taseuevelase aac deeenetasstantieeedeeteeaeks 8 38 Collect Configuration In formattOn
107. OS setup utility lt Menus to check Advanced I O Device Configuration PS 2 Mouse Advanced Numlock gt L Are the server drivers installed Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse drivers are installed These drivers are installed along with the OS Some OS s allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings Refer to manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct LJ Is the server in the Secure Mode In the Secure Mode the keyboard and mouse are disabled To release the Secure Mode enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility Fail to access read or write to the floppy disk E E Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks Is the floppy disk write protected Place the write protect switch on the floppy disk to the Write enabled position Is the floppy disk formatted Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk Is BIOS configuration correct The floppy disk drive may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility lt Menus to check Main Legacy Floppy A Security Floppy Write Protect gt 8 26 Troubleshooting LJ Is the server
108. PU unless it is failed To maintain the cooling effect in the server install the dummy sponge onto the processor 3 and 4 sockets when the CPU is not installed to these sockets m After the operation heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of the heat sink adhere to the CPU To remove the heat sink from the CPU first turn the heat sink to the left and right lightly to make sure that the heat sink can be apart from the CPU Removing the heat sink with it adhering to the CPU may cause the CPU and or socket to be defected Do the following procedure if a CPU is removed or replaced 1 Start SETUP to select menus Main Processor Settings Processor Retest in the order to clear the error information on the removed CPU see Chapter 4 When a CPU 1s replaced select menus Main Processor Settings to confirm that the ID and L2 and L3 Cache of the additional CPU are defined normally see Chapter 4 2 Select Yes for Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu This is required to update the hardware configuration information See Chapter 4 for details Upgrading Your Server 9 63 CABLE CONNECTION This section describes the cable connection pattern within the server IDE Interface A single IDE connector is installed on the baseboard Two connectors are connected with cables in the normal status One of the connectors is connected to the CD ROM drive normally installed The other connector can be con
109. Peripheral Device Controller IRQ Peripheral Device Controller 0 Systemtimer i 2 Cascaded connection 10 PCI BMC IRQ 3 COM B serial port PCI 11 BMCIRQ PCI ISA COM A serial port PCI 5 PCI LPT2 parallel port BMC IRQ 13 Numeric processor 6 Floppy disk Primary IDE CD ROM drive LPT1 parallel port C 2 IRQ and I O Port Address PIRQ and PCI Device The factory set PCI device interrupts are assigned as follows Use the BIOS setup utility BIOS for interrupt setup See Chapter 4 for details Menu Option mter O SSS S SS PCI IRQ 1 On board SCSI Channel A On board SCSI Channel B C PCI IRQ 10 PCI slot 4 INT A PCI slot 8 INT A Penas eo OS PCI IRQ 22 PCI slot 6 INT B PCI slot 1 INT D PCI slot 2 INT C PCI slot 3 INT D PCI slot 4 INT C om eo ee ee N N N N N N Sr AN AN AAN eo ee S N N N Nr PCI IRQ 30 PCI slot 5 INT D PCI slot 6 INT C PCI IRQ 31 PCI slot 7 INT C PCI slot 8 INT D PCI IRQ 32 PCI slot 7 INT D PCI slot 8 INT C N a_i e e a ee et et a IRQ and I O Port Address C 3 I O Port Address The factory set I O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows 8254 programming interface 60 i Keyboard amp mouse Slave 8259 programming interface F1 FF Logical device configuration EDMA2 compatible mode primary command block register EDMA2 compatible mod
110. Power On Feature Wake On LAN The remote power on function turns on the server through a network It sends a special packet from the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off powered To enable this feature you must select Enabled for Wake On LAN in the Advanced Chipset Control of the Advanced menu of the BIOS setup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 The remote power on feature is not available in the following cases Press the POWER switch once to start the OS and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure m Abnormal previous system shut down No power supply to the server due to turned off breaker disconnected power cord power blackout etc NOTE Wake On LAN feature is supported in 1OOBASE TX adapter on the baseboard It is also supported in PCI slot 1 and 2 if the adapter which applies to Wake On LAN is installed AC LINK Feature When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply UPS unit the server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS to the server AC LINK feature can be enabled or disabled with AC LINK in the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 2 22 General Description Security To help prevent unauthorized entry or use of the system the system includes a full lockable front panel and Server Management software that monitors the system intrusion switch
111. Refer to Chapter 6 for details The major functions of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are To install the OS It installs an operating system To diagnose the system It diagnoses the server To create a support disk It copies utilities in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into a floppy disk to launch them from the floppy disk To update the BIOS It updates the BIOS features of the server To update the Windows System It updates the several resources of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows 2000 To install the utilities It install the management utilities of NEC ESMPRO and NEC MWA To read the online documents It opens the online document files pdf files These functions are available under Windows system NOTE Some features among those listed above can be used from the remote computer via cross cable modem or LAN remote console See Chapter 6 for details 2 24 General Description NEC ESMPRO The NEC ESMPRO is server management software that runs on the OS The NEC ESMPRO includes the NEC ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and the NEC ESMPRO Agent for the NEC Express server NOTE For details of major functions of the NEC ESMPRO system configuration and setups with the NEC ESMPRO see Chapter 6 Available functions of the NEC ESMPRO depend on the OS you install Ask your service representative for details Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility is used for proa
112. Server 2003 Standard Edition and Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition No need to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express Setup Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creates a support disk for installing Windows 2000 Server and Windows 2000 Advanced Server This disk is utilized for Windows 2000 clean installation and for Recovery for Windows 2000 system No need to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express Setup ROM DOS Startup FD Creates a support disk for starting the ROM DOS system Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD Creates a support disk for activating the Off line Maintenance Utility System Management FD Creates a support disk for activating the System Management 6 8 Installing and Using Utilities m Setup Maintenance Partition Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server and created on your system disk About 55MB of the maintenance partition includes the various maintenance utilities and executable commands In this menu you can create the maintenance partition install the various utilities and update the utilities The maintenance utilities installed in the maintenance partition are system diagnostics System Management and Off line Maintenance Utility IMPORTANT m Do not reset or turn off the server while the running this menu If the processing is discontinued the system becomes unable to start
113. System battery is dead Replace and run SETUP A Do not remove the lithium battery Your server contains the lithium battery Do not remove the battery Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Placing the lithium or nickel cadmium battery close to a fire or in the water may cause an explosion When the server does not operate appropriately due to the failure of lithium battery contact your service representative to replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by NEC Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by yourself peim Baseboard 1 16 Notes on Using Your Server USER SUPPORT When the server needs after sales service check if the warranty is still valid and determine which service is necessary as indicated on the Certificate Before Asking for Repair do the following when the server appears to fail 1 Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected 2 See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description If it does take the recommended measure for it 3 Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed Check the server using a computer virus detection program Computer virus detection programs are available for purchase in stores If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions consult with your se
114. Updating the System Applying Service Pack nnnnnnnnnneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeserrernrsrserrrrrrrrrrereeens 5 38 Making Backup Copies of System Information ccccccccccccccssccccececeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeess 5 38 Exccpionik oc UDan ne ne a een ence ee oe er eT 5 39 Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities ee eeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeseesneessneneesneneensees 6 1 INE C EXPRESSBUIEDER rusenia a a oats Gace een 6 2 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS Based with Local Console ccccccssssseseeeesesseeeeees 6 4 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with Remote Console ccccccsesseeeeeeeeenes 6 10 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows Based Master Control Menu cc 00seeeeeee 6 13 Conti ourationm Diskette Creator acces seca nsdeaclo earauesncace selene utara Hee aah maw 6 14 INTE CSIP RR Oi cores ee acess eas eee cee eee 6 19 Functions and CAG CS erene E E A ses Neawusteeonaanisbaten Hamed 6 19 NEC NIDN Tiere n A e ee SN a E 6 20 Servers to be Remotely Managed by MWA nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnssessssneessserrrsrerererrrrsrererrrrsrrrrerrrereeens 6 20 Preen ON ecri noa E E E R 6 20 Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console 0000000000000000000000000 6 21 POW Console PIG eaaa A E 6 26 Maor ee WNC IOUS nanei E eat tense na eaceaeler aed ceo 6 26 COMPONE ofc eae ener ere see eee ee ee ee rey eee pean ee ne ee ey nee eer eee mee eee me 6 27 DLS GY al Rate e 0 Pee ee meee
115. Windows 2000 m You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect m On specification an error may occur in relationship with the specified contents of the former screen and require to go back to modify the specification m During the setup the screen to specify the partition that Windows 2000 is to be installed appears The first 55MB area displayed on the screen is a partition that is used to store the configuration information or utilities unique of the server We do not recommend to delete this area but if you do not want to reserve this 55MB area perform the installation by manual setup It is unable to delete this area by Express Setup 10 11 12 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 29 NOTES m Ifyou click Cancel in Basic Information screen the screen will go back to select the Setup File Cancel exists only in Basic Information screen m Ifyou click OK in Role of Computer screen the setup automatically selects default value for the later specification to continue the installation When all the specification has completed the system reboots automatically Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver If you want to install the optional mass storage driver insert the floppy disk attached to mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the installation Follow the message and take NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and Config
116. XPRESSBUILDER in the way of communicating in remote console Use the serial port to execute System Diagnostics with remote console The LAN connection is not for System Diagnostics Procedures to start the diagnostics program 1s as follows Shutdown the OS and turn off the server Then unplug the power cord 2 Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server 3 Plug the power cord and turn on the server 4 Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM to reboot the server See Chapter 6 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for details The following menu appears when started the server using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER i Cope ihi CMEC Componat icnild WEL BEPRESSBITLLER Per aua Corporation al Local console Remote console 5 Select Tools 6 Maintenance 7 9 Select System Diagnostics The System Diagnostics starts and completes in approximately three minutes When the diagnosis completes the test window title shows Test End as the following figure Diagnosis tool title Test windows title TeDoLi TEst amp Diagnosis On Linux Ver001 00 Build0209Q Test result Test End Start10 06 58 End 10 09 58 Pass 000 03 00 TestTime 000 03 00 Test End lt System gt CACHE lt SCSI gt NormalEnd 03 AbnormalEnd OO ForceEnd 00 Cache 49 count NormalEnd HDD_02 000 DK32DJ 36W 89 count NormalEnd Enter Detail Information ESC Return to Enduser Menu Guide line Diagnosis tool title Test windows title
117. Zz 3 3V PCI X hot plug Upgrading Your Server 9 25 There are three types of PCI boards 5V PCI boards 3 3V PCI boards and universal PCI boards A 5V PCI board must be installed in the 5V PCI slot and a 3 3V PCI board must be installed in the 3 3V PCI slot A universal PCI board can be installed in any PCI slot 5 V PCI Board 3 3 V PCI Board Universal PCI Board RAID Controller Considerations Note the following on the configuration of a disk array To change the disk array configuration or the RAID the hard disks must be initialized If important data is saved in the hard disks used to constitute a disk array first back up the data in other hard disks before installing boards and configuring the disk array m More than one hard disk is required to configure a disk array m Hard disks used in the disk array configuration should have the same disk revolution rate and capacity in packs m See table in the next page for the slot in which a board can be installed Up to four disk array controller boards can be installed in the server m Several RAID Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Independent Disks levels can be set for the disk array configuration in the server in which disk array controller boards are installed Refer to the documentation coming with the disk array controller for details of the available RAIDs data transfer rate and array configuration The available capacity of the hard disks in the disk ar
118. ack m Do not apply any pressure to the plug of the power cord See the Installation procedure when the mechanical components of the rack are removed also 3 24 Setting Up Your Server CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES Connect peripheral devices to the server The server is provided with connectors for wide variety of peripheral devices on its front and rear The figure on the next page illustrates available peripheral devices for the server in the standard configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details m Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the NEC Express Server plugged to a power source m Do not use any unauthorized interface cable IMPORTANT Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection Connecting a powered peripheral device to the powered server will cause malfunctions and failures excluding the USB device To connect a third party peripheral device or interface cable to the server consult with your service representative for availability of such a device or cable Some third party devices may not be used for the server The 1OOBASE TX 1O0BASE T connector and the serial port B connector of this server have the same shape Be careful not to connect a cable to
119. after the system update For more information see Installing and Setting Device Drivers in Chapter 5 m Ifthe hard disk can not be recognized you can not recover the system Follow the procedure below and use the information in the disk not system recovery disk to recover the system 1 2 3 Turn on the power of the system Insert Windows 2000 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of your server Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server Press F6 while the message Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration 1s displayed at the upper part of the screen NOTE Nothing is changed on the screen through F6 is pressed Press S when the following message appears Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices Select Other and press Enter Insert Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards Win2000 and press Enter Then it returns to the screen of step 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 Troubleshooting 8 43 Selec
120. alling Windows 2000 E 3 Partition Size The minimum required partition size for installation of Windows 2000 1s 1000MB Paging file size Dump file size Paging file size recommended installed memory 1 5 Dump file size Installed memory size 12 MB IMPORTANT m The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug information memory dump If you set the default value of paging file size smaller than the recommended value the accurate debug information memory dump may not be collected m The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size m The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if installed memory size is 512MB the minimum required partition size is 1000 512 1 5 512412 2292MB Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size 2 See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written then after in
121. am a MOOOMAA AOD A im Ke Oooo O al l l i o a 3I Blank cover 13 Remove two screws from the external SCSI cable connector 14 Align the cable end with the hole on the rear of the server 15 Fix the cable connector from the outside of the rear face with two screws removed in Step 13 16 Install the removed parts Upgrading Your Server 9 71 Serial Interface It is possible to move serial port B located at the front of the unit to the rear Use the serial cable for the rear face coming with the server for the connection The connection procedure is described below 1 en eS Se SS See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the front access cover Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover Remove the memory board Loosen the two screws with which the fan unit is fixed Lift the fan unit straight to pull out it from the server Remove the serial cable from the connector on the front of the server Serial cable 10 Remove the serial cable from the connector on the baseboard IMPORTANT Save the removed cable carefully 9 72 Upgrading Your Server 11 Connect the rear serial cable coming with the server to the connector on the baseboard 12 Route the cable to the rear of the server See the figure below for the cable routing
122. ance Utility m Memory dump feature using the DUMP switch Power Saving Feature mM Sleep feature available for Windows Server 2003 Windows 2000 Easy and Fine Setup mM NEC EXPRESSBUILDER system setup utility Express Setup Configuration Diskette Creator SETUP BIOS setup utility SCSI Select SCSI device utility General Description 2 15 Power Supplies The system contains two auto sensing 430 watt power supplies at an operating frequency of 50 60 Hz A third optional power supply may be added as part of a fault tolerant hot swap design With three power supplies installed in the unlikely event of a power supply failure the load is transferred to the remaining power supply without interruption to normal operation In this case the faulty power supply can be replaced without powering down the system NOTE The power supplies are not hot swappable unless there are three supplies installed The power supplies are designed to comply with existing emission standards and provide sufficient power for a fully loaded system configuration Peripheral Bays The system supports a variety of standard PC AT compatible peripheral devices The chassis includes these peripheral bays m Media bay for installing the standard 3 5 inch floppy disk drive supports 720KB and 1 44MB floppy disk media and the standard CD ROM drive m A 5 25 inch device bay for installing half height 5 25 inch peripheral devices such as an optional
123. and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Create Support Disk from Tools Select Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Create Support Disk menu Installing Windows 2000 E 5 Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Create from Master Control Menu Master Control Menu runs on the following operating systems Windows Me 98 95 Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4 0 Windows XP You can create Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from Master Control Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Run Windows Me 98 95 or Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4 0 Windows XP Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Master Control Menu will appear Click on Setup with left mouse button and click Make OEM DISK and then for Windows 2000 NOTE You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it sa
124. appear according to the modified specification In such case follow the message to restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 17 Windows Dr Watson Windows Dr Watson is a debugger for application errors If any application error is detected Dr Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information log Follow the procedure below and specify Dr Watson to collect diagnostic information 1 2 Click Run on Start menu Type drwtsn32 exe in the Open box and click OK The Dr Watson for Windows dialog box appears Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the Log File Path box The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name DRWTSN32 LOG NOTE You can not specify network pass Specify the pass on local computer Specify the location of crash dump file in the Crash Dump box NOTE Crash Dump File is a binary file that can be read with Windows Debugger Check the following check box on the Option box O Dump Symbol Table O Dump All Thread Contexts CO Add To Existing Log File LJ Create Crash Dump File For more information on each function above refer to Online Help Click OK 5 18 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Network Monitor Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble To utilize Network Monitor you need to restart the system after the installation has compl
125. ar If you select Yes SETUP is terminated with the newly selected information saved in CMOS non volatile memory Then the server automatically reboots the system Exit Discarding Changes Select this 1tem to terminate SETUP without saving the newly selected information in CMOS non volatile memory Selecting Yes allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information If the setting value is modified the confirmation screen will appear Selecting No allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information If you select Yes in the next screen SETUP is terminated with the modified information saved in CMOS Then the server automatically reboots the system 4 34 Configuring Your Server Load Setup Defaults Select this item to return all the values of SETUP to the default values Selecting Load Setup Defaults causes the confirmation screen to appear Select Yes to return the values to the default values Select No to return to the Exit menu screen Load Custom Defaults If you select this menu and press Enter the saved custom default values are loaded Save Custom Defaults If you select this menu and press Enter the parameters set currently are saved as the custom default values After the storage the Load Custom Defaults menu appears Discard Changes Select this item to return the values modified currently to the previous values before saving the values to CMOS Sel
126. are The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO utility NEC recommends that you should install the NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability enhancement features of the server Floppy Disk The following describes use of the floppy disk Floppy disk type The server uses 3 5 inch floppy disks You can use the following two types of 3 5 inch floppy disks m 2HD floppy disk double sided high density track type Stores data of 1 44MB m 2DD floppy disk double sided double density track type Stores data of 720KB Shutter Catching hole Insertion direction indicator Head window Centering hub Centering hole Write protection High density media hole 2HD only Write protection switch B 2 Other Precautions Notes on use The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care Keep the following notes in mind to use it Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes Attach the label to the correct position Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball point pen Do not open the shutter Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place Do not place anything on the floppy disk Do not leave the floppy disk in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks or in a pla
127. arest to the front face among the rear holes on the slide rail assembly using two screws D Arm bracket 900 Setting Up Your Server 3 19 17 Install the other end of the cable arm on the arm bracket installed in step 16 m For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 700 mm Fix the arm bracket with two screws D and two washers B at the position shown in the figure below m For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 743 mm Fix the arm bracket with four screws D and four washers B at the position shown in the figure below 3 20 Setting Up Your Server m For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 760 or 900 mm Fix the arm bracket with four screws D and four washers B at the position shown in the figure below the figure below shows the example with the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 900 mm Arm bracket 900 18 Push the server into the rack once to check the installation position NOTE Make sure that the four screw holes at the upper left and right sides on the front of the server are fit to the core nuts installed in step 2 If the four positions are not fit at all the slide rail assembly or the core nuts may be installed incorrectly If so the adjacent units cannot be installed without clearance Confirm the installation positions and
128. array controller or SCSI controller boards to be installed are connected to the hard disk in which OS is installed set this item to Enabled When the LAN controller board with installation of the option ROM BIOS is used but the board does not provide network booting set this item to Disabled Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 21 I O Device Configuration Selecting I O Device Configuration on the Advanced menu shows the following screen Enabled See the table below for the items IMPORTANT Note that the interrupt and or base I O address are not overlapped with others If the value set for the interrupt or base I O address is used in another resource the yellow asterisk appears Reset any item with the yellow asterisk properly 4 22 Configuring Your Server Option Parameter Description Your Setting Serial Port A Disabled Enabled Auto Base I O Address Interrupt IRQ 3 IRQ 4 Serial Port B Disabled Enabled Auto Base I O Address Interrupt IRQ 3 IRQ 4 Parallel Port Disabled Enabled Auto Output Only Bi directional EPP ECC 278 IRQ 7 DMA 3 Legacy USB Disabled Enabled Support Specify whether serial port A is enabled or disabled Selects the base address and interrupt IRQ for serial port A These menus are displayed if the Serial port A is enabled Specify whether serial port B is enabled or disabled Selects the base addres
129. as the value specified for HUB Click OK on the property dialog box for network adapter When PROSet is installed 1 4 The Intel PROSet dialog box appears The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu point to Control Panel and click Intel PROSet The procedure in the case of the classic start menu 1 Click Start menu point to Settings and click Control Panel 2 Double click Intel R PROSet on the Control Panel window Click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Speed and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex Settings value the same as the value specified for HUB Click Apply and click OK Specify the other network driver with the same progress above Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection 5 14 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter Optional Network Board Driver N8104 80 86 103 111 113 If you want to utilize optional Netwo
130. aseboard The following describes configuration for the SCSI controller on the baseboard of the server Running the Utility To run the utility perform the following procedures 1 Power on the Express server Press Esc to display the POST execution screen when the following message appears under the NEC logo Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu The following message appears while POST is in progress IMPORTANT The message appears for each additional SCSI controller Adaptec SCSI BIOS v4 10 c 2002 Adaptec Inc All Rights Reserved 4 4 4 Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for SCSISelect TM Utility gt gt gt Press and hold Ctrl and A The SCSISelect utility starts and then the channel selection menu appears Select AIC 7902 A at slot 00 01 04 00 or AIC 7902 B at slot 00 01 04 01 in the channel selection with the cursor keys and press Enter AIC 7902 A at slot 00 01 04 00 AIC 7902 B at slot 00 01 04 01 The baseboard is provided with two SCSI controller channels Channel A 01 04 00 indicates the Ultra 320 SCSI connector for hard disks and Channel B 01 04 01 indicates the Ultra 320 SCSI connector for 5 25 inch devices and external SCSI devices Select the device number in the box and press Enter The Options menu appears Select Option and press Enter Options Configure View Host Adapter Settings SCSI Disk Utilities If you wish to format a disk verify disk media or displ
131. at all Follow the instruction displayed on the screen If you take a note of any file name in which trouble is detected during the procedure it is useful to diagnose how the system has been damaged Terminates the procedure if the recovery is successful You can verify that the replaced files are correctly copied to the hard disk if the computer is restarted normally 8 44 Troubleshooting OFF LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY The Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS independent maintenance program When you are unable to start the OS dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem the Off line Maintenance Utility can be used IMPORTANT m The Off line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your sales agent The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and the Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility but do not attempt to use the utility by yourself Contact your sales agent and follow instructions m Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server Troubleshooting 8 45 Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways m From the CD ROM Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and reboot the system After the menu is displayed on the screen select Tools Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility program starts from t
132. ate at PCI X 66MHz PCI X 100 Only PCI boards operating at PCI X 100 MHz available for Hot Add Provide Hot Add for PCI boards MHz operating at the same clock PCI boards installed on the same bus Clock speed Provide Hot Add for PCI boards operating at the same clock Status Lamps Four pair of LED indicators on the back panel of the electronics bay indicates the status of the hot plug PCI add in boards m PCI slot Power lamp green Lights when power is supplied normally to the PCI board installed m PCI slot Fault lamp amber Lights when an error occurs on PCI board or the slot connecting the PCI board PCI slot Fault lamp PCI slot Power lamp 9 32 Upgrading Your Server Hot Add Take the following procedure to execute Hot Add 1 Pull out the server from the rack with the power being on 2 Remove the rear access cover 3 Locate the slot in which you are going to install an addit
133. ature and overvoltage conditions fan failure or chassis intrusion To enable accurate monitoring the BMC maintains the nonvolatile Sensor Data Record SDR from which sensor information can be retrieved The BMC provides an ISA host interface to SDR sensor information so that software running on the server can poll and retrieve the server s current status The BMC performs the following Monitors server board temperature and voltage Monitors processor presence and controls Fault Resilient Boot FRB Detects and indicates fan failure Manages the SEL interface Manages the SDR Repository interface Monitors the SDR SEL timestamp clock Monitors the system management watchdog timer Monitors the periodic SMI timer Monitors the event receiver Controls secure mode including video blanking diskette write protect monitoring and front panel lock unlock initiation m Controls Wake On LAN via Magic Packet support General Description 2 21 Degradation Feature The degradation feature automatically isolates a failed DIMM processor or cooling fans to assure continuous operation of the server when the POST Power On Self Test self diagnosis program after power on detects such a DIMM processor or cooling fans Failed DIMMs processors and cooling fan may be identified on the screen that the POST displays or with the BIOS setup utility SETUP They may also be identified on the system that has the NEC ESMPRO installed Remote
134. ay a list of devices and their SCSI Ids select SCSI Disk Utilities If you wish to configure the adapter or a device select Configure View Host Adapter Settings Configuring Your Server 4 37 Exiting the Utility To exit the utility press Esc until a message prompts you to exit if you changed any setting you are prompted to save the changes before you exit Configure View Host Adapter Settings The Configure View Host Adapter Settings has the following menu items and parameters Read descriptions to select a correct parameter for each menu item Configuration SCSI Bus Interface Definitions SCSI Controller ID 7 SCSI Controller Parity Enabled SCSI Controller Termination Automatic Additional Options Boot Device Configuration Press lt Enter gt SCSI Device Configuration Press lt Enter gt Advanced Configuration Press lt Enter gt lt F6 gt Reset to Host Adapter Defaults SCSI Bus Interface Definitions To set three menu items under SCSI Bus Interface Definitions select a menu item with the cursor keys or and press Enter to fix the item Use the cursor keys or 1 for parameter selection The following table lists menu items available parameters and descriptions Menu it
135. ay cause eye strain or poor eyesight Adjustment of Display Unit Angles Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and vertical angles This adjustment is important to prevent the screen from reflecting bright lights and to make the display contents easy to see You will not be able to keep good working posture and you will feel more tired than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal and vertical angles Adjustment of Screen Brightness and Contrast The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions The most suitable brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the working environment well lighted room or insufficient light Adjust brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy tosee An extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes Adjustment of Keyboard Angle The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an angle Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders arms and fingers Cleaning of Equipment Clean equipment regularly It is difficult to see the display contents on a dusty screen Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight Fatigue and Rest If you feel tired you should stop working and do light exercises 1 18 Notes on Using Your Server This page is intentionally left
136. ay monitoring utility is installed it may display or act as follows If the DISK lamp does not light in amber after auto rebuild however auto rebuild has completed successfully Displays Rebuild was cancelled on the screen while auto rebuild is in progress Appears to stop and restart auto rebuild Observe the following notes for auto rebuild m Do not power off the server in the period between a hard disk error and completion of auto rebuild m When you removed a hard disk wait at least 90 seconds before installing the hard disk back again m Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is in progress The DISK lamp flashes in green and amber alternatively while rebuilding the hard disk Upgrading Your Server 9 11 Power Supply Unit Even if a single power supply unit fails the server can continue its operation without interruption when additional power supply unit is installed in the redundant configuration Installation Take the following steps to install a power supply unit 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Loosen a screw to remove the blank cover IMPORTANT Keep the removed blank cover for future use PS1 slot indicated as PS1 AC1 Nm 9 nw en iL i PS2 slot er O indicated as PS_SHARE oF PS3 slot indicated as PS2 AC2 3 Slide the power supply unit into the vacant slot until you feel resi
137. back to the Role of Computer screen Select Use Existing Array at New Existing RAID Configuration but the OS is installed in the whole area of the disk Is there any other partition than the partition to re use excluding maintenance area If the partition other than the one to re use does not exist the setup will reserve the whole area of the disk to install Windows 2000 Specified to join the Domain but the system is installed as Workgroup When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation it will install the system as Workgroup Open System in Control Panel to specify joining the Domain Specified large value as partition size but when Windows 2000 is actually started the system partition is created by 4095MB Is the Partition Size specified by the value larger than the real area If you want to create one partition in all area of the hard disk excluding the maintenance area to install the OS specify Al Area Windows 2000 started with different display resolution from the specified value Ifthe specified display resolution can not be used the system will use the nearest value or the default value of the driver Entered the incorrect Product ID CD key Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID CD key Express Setup will start However the setup will stop and asks you to re enter the correct value Also in this case input request will occur when rebooting after GUI setup co
138. bay or covering the bay with a dummy cover protects the System EMI integrity and cooling When you install a drive save the dummy cover to reinstall if you should later remove the drive and not reinstall one in the same bay 9 22 Upgrading Your Server Rear Access Cover The rear access cover provides access to the hot swap fans and to the electronics bay that contains PCI add in cards and the baseboard 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 A to 1 8 for details Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed Removal See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Loosen the captive screws located on the rear edge of the cover While lightly pressing down on the cover slide it toward the rear of the chassis Se a E a Lift the cover up and off of the chassis Installation IMPORTANT Before installing the rear access cover check that you have not left tools or loose parts inside the system 1 Position the cover on the chassis so that the cover tabs align with the chassis slots 2 While lightly pressing down on the cover slide it toward the front of the chassis until the cover tabs fully engage the chassis slots 3 Attach the cover to the chassis with the captive screws located
139. ble click Computer Management The Computer Management dialog box appears Click System Tool System Information Click Save as System Information File in the Operation menu Input the file name to save in the File Name box Click Save oS Se oe a 8 40 Troubleshooting COLLECTING DR WATSON DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION Dr Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors The location to save the information can be specified as you like For more information refer to Chapter 5 MEMORY DUMP If an error occurs the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information If you saved the dump to DAT write down that it is saved as NTBackup or ARCServe on the label You can specify the location to save the diagnostic information as you like For more information refer to Specifying Memory Dump Debug Information refer to Chapter 5 for detail IMPORTANT Consult with your service representative before dumping the memory Dumping the memory while the server is in the successful operation may affect the system operation m Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient virtual memory Ignore this message and proceed Restarting the system may result in dumping improper data Preparing for Memory Dumping Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart In such a case it is required to force the server to shut down This f
140. cation dialog box 8 Close the Control Panel dialog box To start Network Monitor point to Program Administrative Tools and click Network Monitor For information on how to operate Network Monitor refer to Online Help Installing Maintenance Utilities Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM See Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations 5 38 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Updating the System Applying Service Pack Update the system in the situation below m CPU is expanded expanded to single processor to multi processor Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority e g Administrator and insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Setup Software in Master Control Menu screen appears so left click the item Click Update the System from the menu and the setup will start After that follow the message to continue the setup process and apply Service Pack Making Backup Copies of System Information The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server Save the information after completing the system setup Without the backup data you will not be able to recover the information You can save the information by the f
141. ccccessessssssssssssssssssssssseeaes 2 24 yi Usine YOU SEVE urinaire E E Pre ater A E ere ere eee 2 25 EES aE biev Aa ener E reece Mr ee E er eee fer nen ter ar ear OE terrane er nee ree ner ee re arene ee 2 25 POWER S Vite isi en ete cite ne recat eis ed ea etn te le aa 2 26 POS ee meer cree rene ie ce rer nO Ane Rn ra oe er E oe een eee ne ee en ae eee 2 27 SEEEPS V 6 eee ee omen cee ee ote OR re On eee a ene erro en ee ae ee 2 32 Ploppy Disk Drive gs Ai eee ed ee ee 2 33 CDROM DIVO assed aed ces ck eee a sccsatcat a aaa etn cad deat oe N eae 2 35 Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server ccccccssseecccseeeceneeeceneeeceneeecneesceneesonesseaneeseneesss 3 1 LON aea E AE eb oscitsns hiosasu aaah atonement ate eeoaoes 3 2 STENE a cn cae PN ne E ECE RE RT ee Ten a OEE Oe ee eR ten eRe a 3 3 MAAS CAAT OM 5 aha deteathtsetatngs ca tate daca mnarabactia sche E raged pea ceenntdd Geteeaseosa te mneynemeen tad 3 3 MIS talAGLONCOI RAC Eea a I a N 3 3 Unpacking the SVS CM riein a a a a A E 3 5 Assembling the Rack mount System 0000000noo0oeoeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeesesseeessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssne 3 6 ESD Preca on sana a e a T 3 7 CHECKING LC OID OM CMS oeeie a a ae AET 3 7 Reouired Tool easier a a T ET 3 8 l stallaton Procedure sereen i A a a T ET 3 9 FSI OV POC adur ou epa a r r EENT 3 22 Conmecting Peripheral DEVICES cscs ta onassdanostapseeedicassatbaleadcxeleasbateieedesvoleaseateitestexeial tate measeunieadtoks 3
142. ce 1s normally operated Intel R PRO 100 S Server Adapter Properties The message in the property depends on the location of the PCI board slot Upgrading Your Server 9 45 Memory Board To install or remove the DIMM remove the memory board first NOTE Up to 24GB of memory 2GB DIMM x 12 can be installed The DIMMs installed as standard need to be replaced in this case A DIMM of 256MB 1s installed in DIMM slots 1 to 4 at shipment Removal Remove the memory board in the following procedure IMPORTANT The memory board is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the memory board Do not touch the memory board terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place the memory board directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover Ot ge OY IS Hold the both edges blue marking of the memory board and gently lift the memory board out of the chassis IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the memory board and DIMM do not tilt the board while lifting up from the system 6 Place the memory board on a dry clean and static free place 9 46 Upgrading Your Server
143. ce exposed to cigarette smoke Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a chemical may be accidentally sprayed over them Do not place any magnetic objects e g magnet near the floppy disk Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust Other Precautions B 3 m Write protection A floppy disk has a write protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental erasure Write protection notch Write Write disabled enabled You can read data from a write protected floppy disk but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format it NEC recommends that you should write protect any floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about to save data To write protect a 3 5 inch floppy disk use the write protect switch provided on its back m Disk format To write data into a floppy disk the floppy disk must be formatted Formatting is to initialize the floppy disk and make it available for the system environment operating system IMPORTANT Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it if any Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not available with the server Use a formatted floppy disk to work with it on the DOS command line The format method depends on your operating system Refer to the manual that comes with your operating system fo
144. city from your body before handling the CPU Do not touch the CPU pins by a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier m When using the server with the single processor configuration CPU must be mounted on the Processor 1 m Install the CPU in the numerical order see figure above To maintain the cooling effect in the server install the dummy sponge onto the processor 3 and 4 sockets when the CPU is not installed to these sockets NOTE If the different revision of the processor is installed in the multiprocessor system Windows 2000 logs the following information every startup If this message is logged it is no problem for operation Event Date 723 2001 Source Application Popup t Time 13 38 Category None Type Information EventID 41 User N A Computer SERVER 1 Description The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of the least capable processor in the system Should problems occur with this system contact the CPU manufacturer to see if this mix of processors is supported Data Bytes Words 0000 00 00 00 00 01 00 d4 00 Af 0008 00 00 00 00 29 00 00 40 0010 02 00 00 00 29 00 00 40 0018 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0020 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O
145. ctive maintenance and fault analysis of the server Normally this utility is used by the maintenance engineer Refer to Chapter 8 for details System Diagnostic Utility The system diagnostic utility contained in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to prevent the hardware failures See Chapter 7 for details NEC Management Workstation Application NEC MWA The NEC Management Workstation Application NEC MWA is an application program for remote management of the server from a system management computer a computer with the NEC ESMPRO Manager running through a network The MWA provides management on the process from power on POST execution to OS boot up of the server See Chapter 6 or online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER General Description 2 25 USING YOUR SERVER This section describes basic operations of your server including how to use devices such as the floppy disk drive and the CD ROM drive See Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk CD ROM and accessories including the keyboard and the mouse Front Bezel Remove the front bezel to power on off the server to access the floppy disk drive and CD ROM drive and to install remove hard disks to the 3 5 inch hard disk bay IMPORTANT To open the front bezel you must unlock the door with the provided security key Installing or Removing the Front Bezel When turning the power of the server on off accessing to the floppy disk drive or CD ROM drive or installi
146. cts an item on the screen selected Selects the Main Advanced Security System Hardware Boot or Exit menu Changes the value parameter of the selected item When a submenu option an option preceded by is selected these keys are disabled Press Enter to select determine parameters Displays the previous screen Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations screen for SETUP operations appears previous screen Sets the parameter of the currently displayed item back to the factory set parameter Sets the parameter back to the one stored by the server before the SETUP utility was started The highlighted item is currently The help Press Esc to return to the 4 4 Configuring Your Server Configuration Examples The following describes examples of configuration required to use software link features or for system operations Link with Management Software To link with the temperature monitoring feature of NEC ESMPRO Agent Select Server Thermal Sensor Enabled To control power supply of the server with NEC ESMPRO Manager via the network Select Advanced Advanced Chipset Control Wake On Lan Enabled Select Server AC LINK StayOff UPS To link power supply with the UPS m To power on the server when power is supply from the UPS Select Server AC LINK Power On m To keep the server off powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER switch was used
147. d Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover Remove the memory board Remove the processor board air duct Rotate the handles on the processor board until they are fully open 1 ot SP Ok SY ee Using the handles tilt the processor board up and remove it from the chassis 2 9 Place the processor board on a clean dry and static free place Upgrading Your Server 9 57 Installation Install a processor board in the following procedure 1 Insert the tabs on the processor board into the slots on the baseboard 1 IMPORTANT Do not contact the tabs with the components mounted on the baseboard NOTE Make sure that all the tabs are completely inserted into the the slots 2 With the handles in the open position lower the processor board until it rests on the baseboard 2 3 Close and press down on the handles until the processor board is fully engaged with the sockets on the baseboard 3 4 Reinstall the removed components 9 58 Upgrading Your Server Processor CPU The processor board includes four Intel Xeon MP sockets one processor is mounted at the factory Processor CPU 4 Processor CPU 3 Processor CPU 2 Processor CPU 1 IMPORTANT m The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electri
148. d click OK Specify the following driver and click Next INITIO INI A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller When N8103 65F board is installed Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP Ultra320 SCSI When N8103 75 board is installed The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen E 12 Installing Windows 2000 SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP DEBUG INFORMATION Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table Use this table for information about setup and system environment change Hardware Main Unit o ame __ SerialNo _ Date Installed Clock Serial No Date Installed 2 Get no Date Installed 3 Clock SeriaiNo Date Installed 4 Clock Serial No Date Installed Memory Group 1 Size Serial No Date Installed Group 2 Size Serial No Date Installed Group 3 Size Serial No Date Installed Monitor Type Model name Serial No Po atte Installed Hard Disk Tye Seip Now Capacity Date Installed Type number ID1 Type Serial No Capacity Date Installed Typenumber CT Tyee o fSeiano o o y i Date Installed Typenumber o CT o o y Tye o fSeiano Capacity Date Installed Type number Tyee CT Cid SeripstNow Capacity Date Installed Typenumber oP T S y F 2 Product
149. d rear retention mechanisms Carefully push the board until it engages and fully seats in the slot connector IMPORTANT If the board cannot be installed easily remove the board once and then reinstall it Excess force added to the board may cause the board to be broken Close the front and rear latches NOTES m Make sure that the tab is firmly locked If the tab is unlocked the PCI slot does not operate normally since the power is not supplied to the PCI slot m The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots They are for protecting the PCI board already been installed Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the PCI board If the insulator is taken off reinstall the insulator in place Upgrading Your Server 9 29 12 13 14 Reinstall the removed components Turn on the power of the server Then make sure that any error message does not appear in POST If an error message appears write down the message and review the error message list in Chapter 8 Start the BIOS Setup Utility to set the Reset Configuration Data in the Advanced menu to Yes This is required to update the hardware configuration information See Chapter 4 for details Removal Remove the board in the reverse procedure of the installation Then install the connector cap and additional slot cover 9 30 Upgrading Your Server Hot plug PCI Board On the PCI board slots 5 through
150. damage the tab NOTE The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots They are for protecting the PCI board already been installed Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the PCI board If the insulator is taken off reinstall the insulator in place Lock for long card 6 Slowly insert the PCI board into the server 7 Push the PCI board until the correction part of the board is firmly connected into the slot IMPORTANT If failing to install the PCI board correctly reinstall it Be careful not to apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it Applying excess force may cause damage to the PCI board Lock for long card 8 9 10 11 Upgrading Your Server 9 43 Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once and then goes on NOTES m Ifthe server runs on Windows 2000 the operating system automatically recognizes the additionally installed PCI board and installs the driver m If an error occurred in the installed board or slot the PCI Slot Fault lamp goes on amber m Be sure to close the tab slowly and correctly Abruptly closing the tab may cause the system to fail to recognize the PCI board Reinstall the rear access cover and place the server into the rack Take the following steps to chec
151. dware System YO Device Enclosure Temperature Fan Voltage i i x poet tea a Power Su A IMP Community Name ae Software OS i BQ Network AW Expansion Bus Device B Bos Local Poling mE Storage 6 fa File System a son27 esmero wey Bf gt fs Sas Io eI cc H Hardware Software Network IO Device Enclosure Software 2 Network a SF 6 9 Disks Map q Disk Controller Expansion Bus BIOS Local Polling Storage File System 4 G2 Logical Drive Device For Help press F1 D Normal warning W Abnormal A System Board Temperature 23C Status Temperature within accepted range 1 5ystem Board 2 5ystem Board 3 5ystem Board 1 5ystem Board 2 System Board 3 5ystem Board 4 System Board 5 System Board e system Board 1 SCSI Back Panel 2 5CSI Back Panel 3 SCSI Back Panel 4 5CSI Back Panel S SCSI Back Panel 6 5CSI Back Panel 1 L2 Cache For Help press F1 Troubleshooting 8 3 LAMPS The following describes lamps on the server and their indications POWER SLEEP Lamp POWER SLEEP lamp The green POWER SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered When the server is off powered the POWER SLEEP lamp stays unlit The POWER SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power saving mode sleep mode Ifthe OS supports th
152. e or in the water may cause an explosion When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium battery contact your service representative to replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by NEC Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by yourself Disconnect all the power plugs before accessing inside the server or connecting the peripherals The server has two power cords Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the all power plugs from a power outlet before cleaning or installing removing internal optional devices Touching any internal device of the server with its power cords connected to a power source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off powered Disconnect all the power plugs from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a dry cloth Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug which may cause a fire 1 10 Notes on Using Your Server 44 CAUTION N Hot surface Immediately after the server is powered off its internal components such as hard disks are very hot Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before installing removing any component YO Make sure to complete board installation Always install a board firmly An incompletely installed board may cause a contact failure resulting in smoking or fire S Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap The unu
153. e Express Setup from the beginning In case the same result occurred after the restart of installation contact Maintenance Service Company and ask them to check the CD ROM drive Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information There are some errors on the specified setup information Follow the instruction to input the correct value It is not necessary to cancel the installation On Windows 2000 you might be asked to press Enter again after the last reboot of the setup Complete appears on the Role of Computer screen Ifyou click Complete here the setup will select the default value of Express Setup for the later specification to continue the process lt The Default Value for Windows 2000 gt The specification of network protocol Protocol TCP IP DHCP Specified Service Select sharing Microsoft network files and printer Client Microsoft network client Component SNMP IIS Excluding Professional Windows Server 2003 Application NEC ESMPRO Agent Power Console Plus When connecting disk array controller 8 34 Troubleshooting Complete does not appear on Role of Computer screen The Complete does not appear if the setup information file that has already been created is loaded Complete appears only when you first entered the Role of Computer screen Once you go to the next screen from Role of Computer the Complete will not appear even if you enter Back to go
154. e administrator account or other account which is a member of the Administrators group 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into CD ROM drive Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen 3 Click on Setup with left mouse button and click on Update NEC Express5800 system section Continue your work for system update as the following message Click on Restart Computer to restart the system Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive immediately after clicking on Restart Computer IMPORTANT If you change the configuration of the system by adding or removing hardware or Operating system software components or repair the system you must run the system update again Installing Windows Server 2003 D 7 Upgrade installation ee It NOTE If you are using N8103 56F please carry out after removing Procedures below upgrade the installed Windows 2000 to Windows Server 2003 Power on the system and start Windows 2000 Log on as an administrator Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Then Select an operation dialog will appear NOTE If the Select an operation dialog box does not appear start SETUP EXE from CD ROM drive Select Install Windows Server 2003 Then a dialog box asks to select the upgrade or clear installation Select Upgrade recommended and click the Next Follow the messages and continue The system will automatically restart after c
155. e clip until it snaps over the center tab 3 Snap the remaining end of the clip down over its tab 14 Make sure that the heat sink is level NOTES m Ifthe heat sink is not level remove it and then install it again The following probably causes the heat sink not to be level The CPU is not positioned correctly The heat sink clip is not engaged correctly m Do not move the secured heat sink 15 Install the components you removed previously 16 Verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 8 17 Select Yes for Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details 18 To add one or more CPUs to the server in 1 CPU configuration to operate the server with more than one CPU do the procedure below For Windows 2000 change the driver of Computer in the device manager to ACPI multi processor PC and then update the system see Chapter 5 9 62 Upgrading Your Server Removal To remove the CPU prepare the removal referring to steps 1 and 7 in the installation procedure and do the reverse procedure of steps 9 to 13 For removing the heat sink clip press the release lever on the clip down and release the clip from the tab on the processor socket IMPORTANT m Do not remove any C
156. e connected to the Optional device ID6 The termination SCSI B connector either of the SCSI setting should be Termination i na cables can be used at a time invalid connector The wide narrow conversion connector 50 pins is connected to the cable connector for a 5 25 inch device To install a device with 68 pin connector on the 5 25 inch device bay remove the wide narrow conversion connector and then connect the 68 pin connector To connect external SCSI devices install the termination connector on the device at the furthest position or specify the termination with the internal setting of the device Upgrading Your Server 9 65 Disk Array Controller The disk array controller board N8103 81F is an optional PCI board provided to improve the data reliability The installation of this board enables the hard disks in the 3 5 inch hard disk bay of the server or those in an optional disk expansion unit to be used in the disk array configuration NL 3 5 inch disk bay disk Disk array controller SS i array configuration No cable connection to SCSI A connector Disk array configuration of built in disks On the server with the installation of the disk array controller board how to connect the cables for modifying the hard disk configuration to the disk array configuration is described below 1 a 3 4 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server fr
157. e following restrictions m Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on the screen following the server power on m Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start up message of the SCSI Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot IMPORTANT Take a note on the on screen message before contacting your service representative The alarm indication would be a great help for maintenance Troubleshooting 8 15 POST Error Messages When POST detects an error it displays an error message on the display unit screen The following table lists error messages descriptions and actions to take IMPORTANT Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your service representative Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance Error onde Error message Recommended Action Failure Fixed Disk Contact your service representative 0210 Stuck Key Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again 0211 Keyboard error e Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again E Controller Failed e Restart the system If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative nel 3 iaeichlecae locked Unlock key Release the lock of the key switch If the error cannot switch be corrected in spite of the release of the lock contact your service representative 0220 Monitor type does not match CMOS Start the SETUP If the error canno
158. e parts to fall to be broken and or to result in personal injury Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Always pull out a device from the rack in the state that the rack is made stable by the installation of stabilizers or earthquake resistant construction Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack Pulling out more than one device from the rack may cause the rack to be fallen Only pull out a single device from the rack at a time Do not provide the wiring for the rack cabinet to exceed the rating of the power supply To prevent burns fires and device damages the power supplied to the power supply in the rack shall not exceed the rating load of the power branch circuit Contact your electric constructor or the local power company for the requirements on the wiring and installation of electric facilities 1 6 Notes on Using Your Server Power Supply and Power Cord Use 4A WARNING A Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand Do not disconnect connect the plug while your hands are wet Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock 44 CAUTION S gt e e BP gt gt Plug in to a proper power source Use a proper wall outlet Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or a power leak Do not install the server where you need an extension cord Use of a cord that does not meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord and
159. e power saving mode such as Windows 2000 pressing the SLEEP switch blinks the POWER SLEEP lamp in green and place the server in the power saving mode Press the POWER switch to turn out the POWER SLEEP lamp and place the server back in the normal mode The power saving mode is only available when the OS supports the power saving feature Some OS s allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power saving mode when no access 1s made to the server for a certain period of time or to select the power saving mode with a command 8 4 Troubleshooting STATUS Lamp The STATUS lamp stays lit in green when the server is in successful operation When the STATUS lamp is unlit or lit flashing in amber it indicates that the server has failed The following table lists indications of the STATUS lamp descriptions and actions to take NOTES m Ifthe server has the NEC ESMPRO or Off line Maintenance Utility installed you can view the error log to identify the cause of a trouble m To cycle power to the server shut down the server from the OS and reboot it if available If the shutdown from the OS is not available reset or execute the forced shut down or disconnect and connect the power cord to reboot the server STATUS lamp ales amp Description Action indication Lit in green The server is in successful operation Flashing in e The server is in operation with Use the BIOS setup utility SETUP to green its m
160. e rack Doing so bends the frame of the server Consequently the server cannot be pushed back into the rack Placing an object on the server may also cause personal injury if the server drops Do not install the server in any place other than specified Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than specified in this manual Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire a dusty place m ahumid place such as near a boiler m a place exposed to direct sunlight m anunstable place Do not use the equipment in the place where corrosive gases exist Make sure not to locate or use the server in the place where corrosive gases sulfur dioxide hydrogen sulfide nitrogen dioxide chlorine ammonia ozone etc exist Also do not set it in the environment where the air or dust includes components accelerating corrosion ex sulfur sodium chloride or conductive metals There is a risk of a fire due to corrosion and shorts of an internal printed board 1 8 Notes on Using Your Server 44 CAUTION Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power outlet before installing removing any optional internal device or connecting disconnecting any interface cable to from the server If the server is off powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source touching an internal device cable or
161. e secondary command block register Parallel port 3 Serial port B EDMA2 compatible mode secondary command block register 370 377 Floppy disk drive 2 IDE 2 Parallel port 2 3BO0 3BB VGA 3BC 3BE Parallel port 1 3C0 3DF VGA 3F6 or BAR EDMA2 compatible mode primary command block register 3FO 3F7 Floppy disk drive 1 IDE 1 3F8 3FF Serial port A DMA1 expansion write mode register ADO s s CSY Master 8259 ELCR programming Slave 8259 ELCR programming OB DO D1 DMA2 expansion write mode register SMBus control PHPC1 register PHPC2 register 00 01 14 49 4A 4 4 4 4 PCI IRQ mapping index register PCI IRQ mapping data register PCI error status register Address amp status control Rise time counter contro C52 General register GPMs C6C ISA wait register C 4 IRQ and I O Port Address Address C6F CA2 CA3 CA4 CA5 CA6 CA7 CD6 CD7 CF8 CFC CF9 F50 F58 FEOO FE3F BAR4 00 OF Chip in Use Other control registers IPMI MPI KCS interface IPMI SMI interface IPMI SCI SW11 interface Power management index register Power management data register PCI configuration space Reset control General chipset Chipset EDMA2 PCI base address register 4 1 Hexadecimal notation 2 The I O port address of a PCI device is set according to its type and number Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 This section describes the procedures fo
162. e server is powered off its internal components such as hard disks are very hot Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before installing removing any component Symbol indicating a prohibited Description of a danger action may not always be indicated SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS Attentions A Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock A Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught Indicates that improper use may cause the clip of a hand amp Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire A Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam Prohibited Actions Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified Do not disassemble repair or modify the server Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused Mandatory Action Unplug the power cord of the server Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified Make sure to follow the instruction SAFETY INDICATIONS BY COLOR OF THE PARTS Only green area is available for hot swap or hot plug operation To avoid electric shock disconnect all AC cords before accessing to other parts especially blue area inside the system
163. eating invalid delete mirror volume can be operated from Disk Management in Computer Management Connecting MO Device If you operate installing Windows 2000 with MO device connected the installation may not be completed normally In such case detach MO device and then re install the system from the beginning Media such as DAT During the OS installation do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system such as DAT Connecting Hard Disk Connect the hard disk that OS is not going to be installed after installing the OS Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 23 Creating Partition Size The minimum size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Size necessary to install the system 1000MB Paging File Size Recommended Installed Memory Size 1 5 Dump file Size Installed Memory Size 12MB IMPORTANT m The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug information memory dump If you set the default value of paging file size smaller than the recommended value the accurate debug information memory dump may not be collected The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition 1s 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB me
164. ecede a ua dae Gutoncae een drs aatod Se Muloaa oath naes Meade B 4 tape IAC a scien eaten hrc Sa cael cae aaa ears escent eae aude autodata Gaede duet etines tea B 4 Ty DO T k ac sated EEN PEENE E arctica EENE E E EN E EENE EE EE ET B 5 MOUSE essa e e a a A danenaeacena tutte B 6 Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 cccscccsesseceeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeneeseeneesoaes D 1 Before Installing Windows Server 2003 c09 sie re ce ata cert Sasa ease Sian D 1 l stalline Service ae k eeann E A TA EER O TA D 1 Updating Syste Nisrin mee eS ee E AE E E T A TT A T D 1 Disk Configuration Concerning the area displayed as MAINTE P cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeees D 1 Re installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk 0 D 1 MODOVI cea rere a noe ee E ee RC fot er ne eer Oe ese TE D 2 Media suchas DAT ernen E E EAE ETE AE ETE D 2 PAT OU 2E nA A E E Er A A T D 2 Tras tale Windows Server ZOO uarn arna E aT e ea ET a D 3 Creating Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 0 0 D 3 Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation cc ccccccccccccccccceeceeceeeccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeees D 5 MG atin the SyS leae rec ctateta codec a cet lal ie Ware crak aah tine D 6 Upgrade msala 80 0 eee renner mere eer tre seer rene array Terrien her Prey a rae Meer terete D 7 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings cccccccccccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeese
165. ecting Discard Changes causes the confirmation screen to appear Select Yes to discard the newly selected information and return to the previous values Save Changes Select this 1tem to save the newly selected information to CMOS non volatile memory without the termination of SETUP Selecting Save Changes causes the confirmation screen to appear Select Yes to save the newly selected information to CMOS non volatile memory Configuring Your Server 4 35 SCSI BIOS SCSISelect The SCSISelect utility is provided to configure the SCSI controller on the baseboard or the SCSI controller on an optional board This utility may be started with a simple key operation while POST is in progress and requires no specific start up disk Using SCSISelect Utility Use the SCSISe ect utility mainly to set the transfer speed of connected SCSI devices The SCSI devices include those installed in the 5 25 inch device bays and backup devices such as an external DAT and MO but not hard disks IMPORTANT SCSI configuration must be made on a per SCSI controller basis with a utility The server contains one SCSI controller When you added optional SCSI controllers you need to make configuration for each SCSI controller in addition to the standard internal SCSI controller Some additional SCSI controllers may require a different utility to make changes to the configuration 4 36 Configuring Your Server Configuring SCSI Controller on B
166. ed in the table below Message Cause and Remedy This machine is not supported This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is not designed for this server Execute the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server NvRAM access error An access to the nonvolatile memory NVRAM is not acceptable Hard disk access error The hard disk is not connected or it is failed Check whether the hard disk is correctly connected The system specific information The system specific information cannot be does not exist on the baseboard acquired in the baseboard exchange and so Please restore the backup data or ON write the data by using System Information Management of the Off line Maintenance Utility Only the authorized personnel are allowed to do this operation Troubleshooting 8 33 Problems with Express Setup lt For Windows 2000 gt Following message appeared when you tried to install Express Setup to the hard disk that has smaller capacity than the specified partition size The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk The setup created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk Setup will continue the process OK Itis not an abnormal condition Press Enter to continue the installation The message can not be displayed correctly when copying the files from CD ROM or checking CD ROM Press R When any messages appear again even if you press R restart th
167. ed memory capacity for online spare memory Enabling the memory mirroring or online spare memory feature does not influence the operations of applications The each feature 1s automatically disabled when the following error message is displayed 8200 Online Spare Memory was not ready The memory board capacity for online spare memory DIMM group 3 does not match the capacity of DIMM group 1 or DIMM group 2 Check the memory board capacity 8201 Mirroring Memory was not ready The memory board capacity for memory mirroring DIMM group 3 does not match the capacity of DIMM group 1 or DIMM group 2 contains memory board Check the memory board capacity or remove the memory board from DIMM group 2 The following indicates that the memory mirroring online spare memory feature has worked a b c The Status lamp on the front panel of the server flashes green The error DIMM group is degraded when the server restarts after the memory mirroring or online spare memory feature has worked If NEC ESMPRO Agent has been installed the following log is registered as a system log of Event Viewer Source name ESMCommonService Event ID 2313 Explanation Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error Memory number XX Date time XX If report setting is made through NEC ESMPRO Agent Manager reporting and ALIVE reporting is performed The report contents are as follows Explanation Part o
168. ee ae ECR ee TERE er Er ee ere ene ee T A ene eee ee 6 29 Manavcement CSOD isas ccc cas toatsesce sacs tee ayasceiacd teed N esate eto eees 6 30 viii Chapter 7 M i ntehaNtEsrnrcssadane a E EEES 7 1 Makine Bacup CODIE oin ae a a 7 1 Clean oes cae Peace ic aed A A O O A 7 2 Clean TNE SOL V CL aa E E E aan gon AEE aaa ee 7 3 Ce ating ne MMrosa a E E 7 4 Cleaning the Keyboard Mouse orreri an e E ETE ee 7 5 ckan t E D ROM Renn aeee nee eeene riae RE E E EEEE 7 6 SVS A BE O UIC EEEE A aie os T E ev T O A O 7 7 TESE IES aaee en ATE EO E O T a TEE A T EE 7 7 Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics cccccceesssssesessessessessssssssssssssssssssssssssessseaaaes 7 8 Relocatino Storno ANG SEVER aren aia msarcteacecst te sbsarcteasedeneemocoseeet ocaaeamasarcneets dexsaueecaeteadeemanaretamees 7 11 Chapters Troubleshooting siisst tess coteeieettrieoectusctetanaieecbebiwcauives apstapebeleseabeniuanusesamecaect 8 1 DV SUSI WIC WICES serr Dotineanes a dealin Duetietadecaa a deni Gehe Doediceadnaa dames deeds 8 2 NSAI S cs reserva Geastetecr E Qeueehonccaet Be diese Sigs E deste Minend na deceate 8 3 FPOWER SLEEP Ercnan oMmmnner reenter ee errr renee Creer rene mC nner tnt Tove ermnrrn a menrT ee hirer ery ter arte 8 3 os Bed Bet BP Iaea ener orn ra nm CEU one eee a Ue ene oe oe 8 4 NBA SS aa GS he feral Mees 01 eee een wer eae E eee ae 8 6 TACING ASAIN DANG CTS Te a oss si stead a don sasha esas naa agen eee tad wanes haeaecs 8 6 O10
169. el m After completing Express Setup see Setup for Solving Problems described later to specify the settings for trouble recovery such as Specifying Memory Dump Installing on the Mirrored Volume If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that 1s mirrored using Disk Management invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk and valid the mirroring again after the installation has completed Creating invalid delete mirror volume can be operated from Disk Management in Computer Management Connecting MO Device If you operate installing Windows Server 2003 with MO device connected the installation may not be completed normally In such case detach MO device and then re install the system from the beginning Media such as DAT During the OS installation do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system such as DAT Connecting Hard Disk Connect the hard disk that OS is not going to be installed after installing OS 5 6 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Creating Partition Size The minimum size for the partition that the system 1s to be installed can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Size necessary to install the system 2900MB Paging File Size Recommended Installed Memory Size x 1 5 Dump file Size Installed Memory Size 12MB IMPORTANT
170. em Parameter Description SCSI Controller ID O 7 15 Select 7 SCSI Controller Parity Enabled Select Enabled Disabled SCSI Controller Enabled Enable or disable the SCSI termination Termination Disabled Select Enabled Factory set 4 38 Configuring Your Server Additional Options To set three menu items under Additional Options select a menu item with the cursor keys or t and press Enter to display its submenu Then select a submenu item with the cursor keys J or t and press Enter to fix the item Use the cursor keys or for parameter selection Boot Device Configuration Move the cursor onto Boot Device Configuration and press Enter to display the following submenu Boot Device Configuration Single Image Master SCSI Controller AIC 7902 A at slot 00 01 04 00 The following table lists submenu items available parameters and descriptions Submenu item Parameter Description Master SCSI Controller Indicates the channel defined as the master SCSI controller display only Factory set a SCSI Device Configuration Configuring Your Server Move the cursor onto SCSI Device Configuration and press Enter to display the following submenu SCSI Device Configuration SCSI Device ID 0 Sync Transfer Rate MB Sec 320 Packetized Yes QAS oe No Initiate Wide Negotiation
171. ement Provides the function to make a back up copy of your data Without the backup data the system specific information and or configuration may not be restored Only the authorized personnel is allowed to restore the backup data m Start of Utilities With the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER you can start the following utilities installed in the maintenance partition System Management System Diagnostics Maintenance Partition Update m Chassis Identify The lamp on the machine is flashed for five seconds This is convenient if you have to distinguish a machine among many machines on the rack Troubleshooting 8 47 RESETTING THE SERVER m Ifthe server halts before starting the OS press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete This restarts the server m Pressing the RESET switch on the front panel reboots the server RESET switch IMPORTANT Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the data in process To reset the server when it is not frozen make sure that no processing is in progress FORCED SHUTDOWN Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server the POWER switch does not turn off the server or resetting does not work Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for at least four seconds The power is forcibly turned off To turn on the power back again wait approximately 10 seconds after turning off the power forced shutdown Press and hold the POWER
172. emory Mirroring enabled or disabled See Chapter 9 for details Factory set NOTES To enable memory mirroring online spare memory feature memory boards in DIMM group 1 and 3 must be the same capacities and type Contact your service representative if you need to use these features 4 16 Configuring Your Server PCI Configuration Selecting PCI Configuration on the Advanced menu shows the following screen Selecting an item on the screen allows the proper submenu to appear Configuring Your Server 4 17 Hot plug PCI Control Selecting Hot plug PCI Control on the PCI Configuration submenu shows the following screen Disabled See the table blow for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting Reserving Disabled Determines memory space at every memory space for Minimum empty slot for PHP PCI Hot plug PHP Middle Reserved memory space is Maximum Disabled None Minimum 6 2 4 MB Middle 48 16 32 MB Maximum 96 32 64 MB Empty Bus Default Refer to Empty Bus Default Speed Speed submenu Factory set 4 18 Configuring Your Server Empty Bus Default Speed Selecting Empty Bus Default Speed on the Hot plug PCI Control submenu shows the following screen See the table blow for the item Option Parameter Description Your Setting PCI Slot 5 6 PCI Slot 7 8 PCI 33MHz PCI 66MHz PCI X 66MHz PCI X 100MHz Selects the type
173. emory or CPU degraded identify the degraded device and e Asingle bit error occurred replace it as soon as possible frequently The server is off powered Power on the server POST is in progress Wait for a while The STATUS lamp will light in a few seconds after POST completion Cycle power to the server If POST A CPU thermal error was displays an error message take a note detected Thermal Trip on the message and contact your service representative was detected A CPU bus error occurred Memory dumping is requested Wait until memory dumping completes Troubleshooting 8 5 STATUS lamp REP SL Description indication Lit in amber A thermal error critical was Check internal fans for dust or debris detected Also make sure that the internal fan cables are firmly connected If this error indication persists contact your service representative operate A voltage error critical was detected Flashing in A power alarm was detected in Identify the failed power supply unit and amber each power system contact your service representative A fan alarm was detected Make sure that the internal fan cables are firmly connected If this error indication persists contact your service representative A thermal error warning was Check internal fans for dust or debris detected Also make sure that the internal fan cables are firmly connected If this error indication persists contact your service represen
174. environment where the air or dust includes components accelerating corrosion ex sulfur sodium chloride or conductive metals Place the rack on a carpet not subject to the anti static process Locate the rack where some objects may fall on the rack Locate the rack near a device that is generating intense magnetic fields such as a TV radio broadcast communication antenna power transmission wire and electromagnetic crane If unavoidable contact your service representative to request proper shielding Locate the rack where the power cord of the server must be connected to an AC outlet that shares other devices with large power consumption Locate the rack next to equipment that generates power noise e g contact spark at power on power off of commercial power supply through a relay If you must install the server close to such equipment request your service representative for separate power cabling or noise filter installation Locate the rack where following conditions can not be satisfied Conditions for operation Temperature 10 to 35 C Humidity 20 to 80 no condensation Itis recommended that the server should be used in a room where temperature is in the range between 15 to 25 C Setting Up Your Server 3 5 UNPACKING THE SYSTEM When you receive your system inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking If the shipping boxes are damaged note the damage and if possible photograph it for reference
175. er s Guide at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary SAFETY INDICATIONS Follow the instructions in this User s Guide for your safety to use the server The server contains components with possible danger hazards that may cause by ignoring warnings and preventive actions against such hazards Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them as well as described in this User s Guide In the User s Guide or warning labels WARNING or CAUTION is used to indicate a degree of danger These terms are defined as follows A WARNING Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious personal injury Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury CAUTION including burns or property damage Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols The individual symbols are defined as follows This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type Attention This symbol indicates prohibited actions An image in the symbol illustrates a particular prohibited action Prohibited Action This symbol indicates mandatory actions An image in the symbol illustrates a mandatory action to avoid a particular hazard Mandatory Action Example Symbol to draw attention Term indicating a degree of danger High temperature Immediately after th
176. er running in the Secure Mode The POWER switch and the SLEEP switch are disabled in the Secure Mode Forced shutdown is also not available To release the Secure Mode enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility POST fails to complete E E Is the DIMM board installed At least four DIMM boards are required for operation Is the memory size large The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large Wait for a while Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the server If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start up POST may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding In such a case restart the server once again Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation until the BIOS start up message appears when you restart the server Does the server have contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed 8 24 Troubleshooting Fail to access to internal or external devices or such devices fail to operate C Are cables properly connected Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected Also make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order C Is the power on order correct When the server has any external devices connected power on the external devices first then t
177. erver Wiring block diagram of the internal cables RJ 45 serial port Serial port conversion DTE DCE straight cable cable with the R label attached 3 28 Setting Up Your Server Connection between the RJ 45 Serial Port and a UPS To connect a UPS to the RJ 45 serial port use the optional serial port conversion cable with the R label attached Be careful not to use the other one with the F label attached Set the jumper pin to DCD DSR factory set IMPORTANT Make sure of the icon of the server and be sure to connect the cable to serial port B Be careful not to connect to a LAN port by mistake To prevent wrong connection write LAN port on a tag and put the tag to the connector of the LAN cable that is to be connected to this server Wiring block diagram of the internal cables RJ 45 serial port Serial port conversion UPS connection cable cable with the R label attached Setting Up Your Server 3 29 Connection between the RJ 45 Serial Port and a Management PC DB39 etc To connect equipment such as a management PC having a DB9 type serial connector to the RJ 45 serial port use the optional serial port conversion cable with the R label attached Be careful not to use the other one with the F label attached Set the jumper pin to DCD DSR factory set IMPORTANT Make sure of the icon of the server and be sure to connect the cable to serial port B Be careful not to connect to a LAN po
178. erver and appreciate its functions to the maximum extent ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE This User s Guide is a guide for proper setup and use of the server This User s Guide also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise during setup or operation of the server Keep this manual for future use The following describes how to proceed with this User s Guide How to Use This User s Guide To aid you in finding information quickly this User s Guide contains the following information Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server includes information that needs attention to use the server Make sure to read this chapter before setting up and using the server Chapter 2 General Description includes information necessary to use the server such as names and functions of its components handling of the floppy disk and CD ROM drives It also includes requirements and advisory information for transfer and disposal of the server Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server tells you how to select a site unpack the system assemble the rack mount subsystem make cable connections and power on your system Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS Setup Utility and the Adaptec Configuration Utility which is used to configure SCSI devices in your system This chapter also provides information on baseboard jumper settings Chapter 5 Installing the Operat
179. es Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring The front bezel of the server contains a mechanical lock to prevent access to the front of the computer chassis The computer chassis includes an intrusion switch for the front access cover When this cover is opened the switch transmits an alarm signal to the system board where server management software processes the signal Software Locks via the System Setup Utility The BIOS SETUP Utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or accidental access to the system Once the security measures are enabled access to the system is allowed only after the user enters the correct password s For example m Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the keyboard and mouse after a specified time out period 2 to 120 minutes Set and enable an administrative password m Set and enable a user password m Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel reset power and sleep switches Activate a hot key combination to enter secure mode quickly m Disable writing to the floppy disk drive when secure mode is set General Description 2 23 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The CD ROM that comes with your server contains a setup utility called NEC EXPRESSBUILDER When you have first installed the server or append features to the server use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to set up your server
180. eseeeeess D 9 PROS CU xk sodss esse ac so erate cass cae eh atetienc sta ane ots oa ere naee eee ea O D 9 INS TWO Bie WIV Cl acids ct eaesnansuevan setae dsvomeducescttaciabasn taste epede isan oaunecttacpacaeetauaeusieteacsoonseuanaetsennenses D 10 Re install the NetwOrk DrIVeT oscari s e a a a a seed aaa a D 11 lmstalline SCSI Contro Ner Driyo egeton a eis ene iea ea D 11 Setting for Collecting Memory Dump Debug Information ccccceeeeeessesssesseeeeeeees D 12 Appendix E Installing Windows 2000 sassannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n E 1 Before Installing Windows 2000 ernan a E eile cata E ATE E A EE EEA E 1 stalne Service PAC E sraon a a E 1 NS APU Syse enoni aa a a a a a toed eet E 1 Disk Configuration Concerning the area displayed as MAINTE P ccccccecccccccceeeeeeeees E 1 Re installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk nn00000000000a E 2 MO DEVIC ernen a tee eget enrages E A T E A AOO E 2 WHC Ta SUC tas DAT ieroci eoni aAa EAA OE EE O E A A E E 2 PAGON SIZO ie ea EATA O EAA AE e AA Ra eS ENE E 3 Has Callao Windows 2000 miraa E A A E E E A E 4 Preparat ons For dostallatio einnar T e e e aaie E 4 Creating Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER eee E 4 Windows 2000 Clean InstallatiOTiiseniaann aenn Ea aE E T E 6 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ccccccccccccccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeessee
181. eted so we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur 1 Point to Settings from Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears 2 Double click Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs dialog box appears 3 Click Add Remove Windows Component The Windows Components Wizard dialog box appears 4 Check the Management and Monitoring Tools check box of the component ON and click Next 5 Ifthe setup asks to install the disk insert Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into CD ROM drive and click OK 6 Click Complete in the Windows Component Wizard dialog box 7 Click Close in the Add Remove Application dialog box 8 Close the Control Panel dialog box To start Network Monitor point to Program Administrative Tools and click Network Monitor For information on how to operate Network Monitor refer to Online Help Installing Maintenance Utilities Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM See Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 19 Updating the System Update the system in the situation below m CPU is expanded expanded to single processor to multi processor Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process Log on to the system with the account that has administrat
182. f the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error Memory number XX Date time XX 9 54 Upgrading Your Server Processor Board Air Duct The processor board air duct is a cover for improving cooling effect of CPU To install or remove the processor CPU remove the processor board air duct IMPORTANT To maintain the cooling effect in the server the processor board air duct must be correctly installed into the chassis Removal Remove the processor board air duct in the following procedure sa eS SY See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover Remove the memory board Remove the screw holding the dual AC inlet located at the top right rear of the chassis and pull it clear of the chassis as far as the attached cords will allow 1 2 Holding the power receptacle and cords clear squeeze together the two tabs on the air duct at the end closest to the rear of the chassis Raise the end rotating the duct until it is clear of the cords 3 IMPORTANT Do not hit on the ICMB board mounted at the rear of the chassis while rotating the duct Disengage the tab at the front of the electronics bay and remove the duct from the chassis Processor board air duct ICMB board AC inlet Release tab Upgrading Your Server 9 55 Installation Install a processor board air duct in the f
183. fely E 6 Installing Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows 2000 1 2 3 Turn on the system power Insert the Windows 2000 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Press Ctrl Alt Delete to reset the system After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk press Enter while the message Press any key to boot from CD 1s displayed at the top of the screen If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk this step 1s unnecessary The Windows 2000 setup screen will appear If the screen is not displayed Enter was not pressed properly Begin after turning on the system power again Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration 1s displayed Ascreen with a solid blue background is displayed IMPORTANT There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed When the following message is displayed press S Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert Windows
184. file is already established When you want to operate other tools remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive and Turn off and on the server to start other tools IMPORTANT When the Operation with remote console is end click the Disconnect on MWA Remote Console 6 26 Installing and Using Utilities Power Console Plus Power Console Plus is a utility to control the RAID system of the disk array controller MegaRAID controller produced by LSI Logic Use of Power Console Plus enables operations e g monitoring and maintenance of RAID systems that are constructed on local NEC Express servers and NEC Express servers connected through networks TCP IP The operations can be done online on graphical screens without the system being stopped Major Functions Power Console Plus has the following features Supporting the Wizard function to facilitate configuration Enabling the change of RAID levels Being compatible with SAF TE Supporting the performance monitor Supporting enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring power monitoring and fan monitoring Enabling the settings of Write Read and Cache policies for each logical drive Supporting the save and restore functions for configuration Enabling the display of the SCSI transfer rate Installing and Using Utilities 6 27 Components Power Console Plus consists of the following five components SNMP Agent This function is not yet supported
185. floppy disk into the floppy disk drive When you completely insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive the drive clicks and the eject button on the floppy disk is slightly pushed out NOTES m You cannot use a 1 2MB formatted floppy disk m When an unformatted floppy disk is inserted the message notifying that date read is not available and the message prompting formatting are displayed Refer to the manual that comes with the OS to format the floppy disk m Ifthe floppy disk contains a system powering on or restarting the server with the floppy disk inserted boots the system from the floppy disk To eject the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive press the eject button NOTE Make sure that the floppy disk access lamp is unlit before ejecting the floppy disk Ejecting the disk when the access lamp is lit may destroy the disk data 2 34 General Description NOTE Use of the floppy disk The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care Keep the following notes in mind to use it Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes Attach the label to the correct position Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball point pen Do not open the shutter Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place Do not place anything on the floppy disk Do not leave the floppy disk in a high temperature place e g place ex
186. g box Check Write data to FD Then select the model name to display the Configuration for BMC dialog box for the server Set and register the configuration information including the computer name on the Configuration for BMC dialog box and then write the information into the floppy disk with the following file name lt Configuration Information File name gt CSL_LESS cfg Select the Properties command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button on the server name to display the Properties dialog box If the Properties dialog box appears provide the following setting lt ID page gt Connection Type COM COM Direct Cross cable Installing and Using Utilities 6 25 10 11 12 Select the Open Remote Console command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button on the server name to start the MWA Remote Console Then click on the Connect button on the MWA Remote Console Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Insert the floppy disk storing the configuration information file into the floppy disk drive Turn off the power of the server and then on again to restart the system After a single reboot MWA Remote Console displays the main menu of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and you can operate tools on the server through the management PC NOTE The main menu appears without rebooting it when the setting in the configuration information
187. g for Solving Problems Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur Memory Dump Debug Information This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump debug information in the server IMPORTANT Cautions for the Memory Dump m The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of collecting memory dump Customers need only to specify the memory dump m If any trouble occur after specifying the process below the message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory may appear but continue to start the system If you re start the system in such case memory dump may not be stored correctly Follow the procedure below to specify 1 Select Control Panel and click System The System Properties dialog box appears 2 Select Advanced tab 3 Click Settings on the Startup and Recovery group box IMPORTANT m To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead m Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 12MB m Incase the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before addin
188. g memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive 5 16 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 4 Specify Complete memory dump and modify Dump file in the Write debugging information group box e g Write the debug information in D drive write the file name MEMORY DMP D MEMORY DMP 5 Click Settings on the Performance group box The Performance Options window appears Click Advanced tab on the Performance Options window Click Change on the Virtual memory group box Modify Initial Size in the Paging file size for selected drive box to the value larger than Recommended and click Set IMPORTANT Be sure to create memory dump with the size described above on the OS partition If Default Size of the paging file is specified to the value smaller than Recommended value the correct debug information memory dump may not be collected For more information on Recommended value see Partition Size to be Created described earlier To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred we recommend you to press dump switch to confirm that the dump will be collected normally in advance m Incase the memory is expanded re specify the paging file to suit the new memory size 9 Click OK The message to restart the system may
189. ger with mechanical components Note high temperature Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack 1 After confirming that the server is off powered remove the power cords and all interface cables connected to the server 2 Loosen two screws with which the cable arm is fixed to the rear of the server to remove the cable arm from the server ENIS N Cable arm 3 Release the security lock to remove the front bezel Setting Up Your Server 3 23 4 Remove four screws C located at both side of the front face of the server to fix it oO 5 Bl m BIT 7A A Dial Unlock Lock 5 Hold the handle to pull out the server from the rack slowly and carefully The server clicks to be latched 6 Push the left and right release levers to release the latch and then pull out the server from the rack slowly Release lever IMPORTANT m Push each release lever using a driver or a similar tool Pushing a release lever with your fingers may cause the fingers to be caught and thus injured m Pull out the server slowly with the bottom supported by more than one person m Secure the power cord s and interface cables with a lock spring m Form the power cord with a slight slack at the AC inlet of the server This is to prevent the power cord from coming off when the server is pulled out from the r
190. h a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Do not wipe the lens of the CD ROM drive Doing so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive Press the Eject button or gently push on the tray front to close the tray Wipe the signal side of the CD ROM with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Wipe CD ROMs from the center to the outside Use only CD ROM cleaner if necessary Cleaning a CD ROM with record spray cleaner benzene or thinner causes damage to the CD ROM contents At worst inserting the CD ROM into the server may cause failure wre OK NG Maintenance 7 7 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server Use the System Diagnostics program in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER provided with the server to diagnose the server Test Items The following items are tested in system diagnostics m Memory m CPU cache memory m Hard disk used as a system IMPORTANT When executing the System Diagnostics make sure to remove the LAN cable Executing the System Diagnostics with the LAN cable connected the network may be influenced NOTE On checking the hard disk no data is written into the disk 7 8 Maintenance Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics There are two ways to diagnose the server to use the local console keyboard of the server itself and to use the management PC via serial port remote console IMPORTANT Two methods of LAN and the serial port are mentioned in Chapter 6 NEC E
191. h free space to enable the file size to be written then after installing the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk Installing Windows Server 2003 D 3 INSTALLING Windows Server 2003 Preparations for Installation NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition CD ROM or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition CD ROM User s Guide Getting Started Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Before installing create Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NOTE If you have already Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows Server 2003 you do not need to create it again You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures a a n m Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER use this procedure If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4 0 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server you can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER C
192. h is Inhibit Enabled enabled or disabled If this item is set to Enabled the power cannot be turned off by using the POWER switch including the forced shutdown The system cannot also enter the power saving mode by pressing the SLEEP switch Factory set NOTE The Secure Mode is used to restrict access from unauthorized users In the Secure Mode the POWER switch SLEEP switch RESET switch keyboard and mouse are disabled The lamps on the keyboard flash in order from the ScrollLock lamp the CapsLock lamp and the NumLock lamp To resume server operation in the normal state from the Secure Mode enter the user password from the keyboard and press Enter key Configuring Your Server 4 27 Server Positioning the cursor on Server shows the Server menu The items which can be set on the Server menu and their functions are described below For the setting first select System Management or Console Redirection and press Enter to display the proper submenu Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Server Item Specific Help gt System Management gt Console Redirection Service Partition Type 12 Additional setup Clear Event Log Press Enter menu to change Assert NMI on PERR Enabled server management Assert NMI on SERR Enabled features FRB 2 Policy Disable BSP Boot Monitoring 5 Minutes Boot Monitoring Policy Retry 3 times Thermal Sensor Enabled BMC IRQ 11 Post Error Pause Enabled
193. hange Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt gt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Previous Value If you press Enter with the selection of either Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password such a screen as shown below appears the screen shown in the figure below appears when Set Supervisor Password is selected Specify the passwords on the dialog box Enter each of the passwords with up to seven characters including alphanumerics and symbols Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Security Item Specific Help User Password Is Clear Supervisor Password Is Clear Set User Password Enter Superviosor Password Set Supervisor Password Enter controls access to the setup utility Password on boot Fixed disk boot sect Set Supervisor Password Secoreaivindeslinien Enter New Password D Hot Key CTRL AL Confirm New Password Secure Mode Boot Video Blanking Floppy Write Protect Disabled Power Switch Inhibit Disabled F1 Help t Select Item l Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit gt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Previous Value IMPORTANT m Set the passwords only after OS is installed Ifyou forget the passwords contact your service representative See the table below for the items Your Setting Set User Up to seven Press Enter to display the user password Password alphanumeics input screen For this password accessing to the SETUP menu is restr
194. he CD ROM m From the floppy disk Set the Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the system The Off line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk The Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting Tools Create Support FD on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Manual start by pressing F4 When the Off line Maintenance Utility is installed press F4 while the start up screen of the server is on screen The Off line Maintenance Utility starts from the hard disk 8 46 Troubleshooting Features of Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility provides the following features Available features vary depending on the way you started the Off line Maintenance Utility IMPORTANT See the on line help for details of the Off line Maintenance Utility For further information ask your sales agent m IPMI Information Viewer Provides the functions to view the system event log SEL sensor data record SDR and field replaceable unit FRU and to make a backup copy of them Using this feature you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part m BIOS Setup Viewer Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP utility to a text file m System Information Viewer Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to a text file m System Information Manag
195. he server C Did you install drivers for connected optional devices Some optional devices require specific device drivers Refer to the manual that comes with the device to install its driver L Is BIOS configuration correct When the server has PCI devices connected make sure to set the PCI device interrupt and others with the BIOS setup utility of the server Most PCI devices generally do not require any change to the configuration but some boards do require specific settings Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details to make correct settings lt Menus to check Advanced Advanced Chipset Control PCI Device gt Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I O port address or operation mode settings Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details to make correct settings lt Menu to check Advanced I O Device Configuration gt Troubleshooting 8 25 The keyboard or mouse fails to operate _ Is the cable properly connected gt Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the server The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is powered not applicable to USB devices Power of the server first and connect it properly _ Is BIOS configuration correct The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server Check the settings with the BI
196. he server POWER SLEEP lamp green Lights in green when the server is powered on Goes off when the server is powered off Blinks when the system is placed in the sleep mode POWER switch The power switch is used to turn on off the power If you press the switch once then the POWER SLEEP lamp goes on and the power is turned on If you press the switch again the power is turned off The system is forcibly shut down when the power switch is pressed continuously for four seconds or longer Dump switch The dump switch is used to collect the event logs having occurred in the server STATUS lamp green amber Lights in green while the server is in successful operation When any error is detected this lamp lights or blinks in amber LAN1 LAN2 ACCESS lamp green Lights in green while the server is connected to the network Blinking in green indicates the network activity Numbers printed near the lamps indicate the LAN port number DISK ACCESS lamp green amber Lights in green while the internal hard disk is in access When any one of the internal hard disks fails this lamp lights in amber General Description 2 7 Rear View See Chapter 8 for detail information on lamp indication
197. he server Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for software selection and configuration The program loads the utilities and drivers applies RAID settings partitions the disk and installs the desired operating system IMPORTANT Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server system Therefore it clears the contents of the hard disk HEC Expresebs00l NEC EXPRESSEUILDER Yers eeee Copyright CINEC Corporation ZU03 aaa es s rererere errer peere li awngi Express Setup refers to the method unique to the system the internal parameters and status of the hardware and installation of OS and various utilities can be set up with Express Setup the attached CD ROM NEC EXPRESSBUILDER seamlessly Lh When you want to use the hard disk in the Wiferent partition from the default setting or reiiMstall the OS use this Express Setup This feature Bmecutes troublesome setup procedures for you Before starting the setup proceset Express Setup edits the data necessary for the intended setup and saves the edited data to the flappydisk and then reads such the stored data during the setup to proceed a series af procedures The floppy disk used is called Configuration Diskette kant ett Cs 2 sa ew ee a For Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows 2000 Express Setu
198. he server on an anti static mat to work with it Cloth Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server Wear anti static shoes to work with the server Take off any jewels a ring bracelet or wrist watch before working with the server Handling of components Keep any component in an anti static bag until you actually install it to the server Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components To store or carry any component place it in an anti static bag 9 4 Upgrading Your Server PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL Follow the procedure below to prepare for installing or removing components 1 2 3 4 3 Shut down the OS If the front bezel is locked unlock it Grasp the right edge of the front bezel and pull the bezel towards you to open it Slide the front bezel left to disengage the mounting tabs and remove the front bezel from the chassis FooooUOUUOUU0 Q 2 5 Unlock Lock 6 Remove all cables and power cords from the server the AC Standby lamps on the front of the server go off NOTE Make sure to disconnect the power cord from the outlet before installing or removing the option devices If you remove the internal cable with the power cord being connected the STATUS lamp will light in amber when the server is powered Disconnect the power cord connect it again and then restart the server To install the fron
199. icrosoft Windows 95 operating system Momentary voltage drop prevention This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning To prevent a momentary voltage drop an AC uninterruptible power supply UPS unit should be used Notes 1 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of NEC Corporation 2 The contents of this User s Guide may be revised without prior notice 3 The contents of this User s Guide shall not be copied or altered without the prior written permission of NEC Corporation 4 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this User s Guide If you notice any part unclear incorrect or omitted in this User s Guide contact the service representative where you purchased this product 5 NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product nor any liability for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of this User s Guide regardless of Item 4 PREFACE Welcome to the NEC Express5800 140Rc 4 server The NEC Express5800 server holds powerful performance and employs the latest technology to implement a computer for the next generation With its potential capabilities the server may be used as the workstation PC that configures a client server system and provides high speed processing and superior reliability Read this User s Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the s
200. icted 4 26 Configuring Your Server Option Parameter Description S Your Setting Set Supervisor Up to seven Press Enter to display the supervisor Password alphanumeics password input screen This password enables all the SETUP menus to be accessed This setting can be done only on login with the password input of Supervisor at start of SETUP Password on boot Disabled Specify whether the passwords are Enabled entered or not on booting At first the supervisor password must be set If the supervisor password is set and this option is invalid BIOS determines that a user is booting Fil NF sector Write Protect disks Secure Mode 2 min Specify the period from no input from the Timer 5 min keyboard or mouse to the point at which 10 min the system enters into the secure mode 20 min 1 hr 2 hr Hot Key Specify the key with which the secure CTRL ALT mode is started Press the selected key with the Ctrl and Alt pressed to start the secure mode Sooare Mode Boot Enabled the secure mode at the siart ofthe server Enabled the secure mode at the start of the server Video Blanking Disabled Specify whether the monitor is Enabled disconnected if the server is entered into the secure mode Floppy Write Disabled Specify whether data write to the floppy Protect Enabled disk inserted into the floppy disk drive is enabled or disabled in the secure mode Power Switch Disabled Specify whether the power switc
201. ides of the server to unlatch the server Be very careful not to get your finger caught in doing so Q D Q Q Q Q A QO T Qg Q 1 N Q 1 o R BE RI o m 1 A P AN Q D o o Q D 0 a a D Q i o o J Q m dy T R a Release lever eT OOOOOUGUUOUOOoOG IMPORTANT Push the release lever using a screwdriver or the like Pushing the lever with your finger may hurt your finger Upgrading Your Server 9 17 Front Access Cover To install or remove devices in the 5 25 inch device bay you will need to remove the front access cover 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed Removal See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack cabinet Remove the three screws While lightly pressing down on the cover slide it toward the front of the server a et OS a Lift the cover up and off of the server Installation IMPORTANT Before installing the front access cover check that you have not left tools or loose parts inside the system Position the cover on the chassis so that the cover tabs align with the chassis slots 2 While lightly pressing down on the cover slide it toward the rear
202. in the FLASH memory on the optional disk array controller board Refer to the manual supplied with the board 7 2 Maintenance CLEANING Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the serer in a good shape A WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Do not look into the CD ROM drive Do not remove the lithium battery Disconnect the power plug before cleaning with the server 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details m High temperature m Make sure to complete board installation Maintenance 7 3 Cleaning the Server For daily cleaning wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth Follow the procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces IMPORTANT To avoid altering the material and color of the server do not use volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to clean the server m The power receptacle the cables the connectors on the rear panel of server and the inside of the server must be kept dry Do not moisten them with water Make sure that the server is off powered the POWER SLEEP lamp goes off Unplug the power cord of the ser
203. in the Secure Mode In the Secure Mode write access to the floppy disk may be disabled To release the Secure Mode enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility Fail to access to the CD ROM U Is the CD ROM properly set in the CD ROM drive tray The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD ROM Make sure that the CD ROM is placed properly in the holder _ Is the CD ROM applicable to the server The CD ROM for Macintosh is not available for use Inserted the correct CD ROM but the message like the following is displayed The CD ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD ROM is inserted Please insert the correct CD ROM OK L Is the data side of the CD ROM dirty or injured Take the CD ROM out of the CD ROM drive confirm that it 1s not dirty or injured reset and click OK Fail to access the hard disk Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller C Is the hard disk applicable to the server Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed C Is the hard disk properly installed gt Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle The hard disk is not connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed see Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 8 27 Fail to access the internal or external SCSI devices E E Is the SCSI device applicable to the server Operation of any SCSI device that is n
204. ined above For details on data erasure ask your sales representative Provided software To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party the following requirements must be satisfied m All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be retained m Transfer requirements listed in Software License Agreement that comes with each software application must be satisfied Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before transferring the server Notes on Using Your Server 1 15 CONSUMABLES Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and require replacement such as fans the internal CD ROM drive the floppy disk drive and the mouse For stable operation of the server NEC recommends you replace these components on a regular basis Consult with your service representative for replacement or the product lives DISPOSAL OF THE SERVER Dispose the server all the internal devices floppy disks and CD ROMs according to all national laws and regulations IMPORTANT For disposal or replacement of the battery on the baseboard of the server consult with your service representative NOTE If the real time clock battery on the baseboard leaches its life the following message appeared on the display while running the POST Contact your service representative to replace the battery 250
205. ing System with Express Setup describes how to install the operating system Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities describes how to install the utilities for the server It also includes a description on using the attached CD ROM NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Chapter 7 Maintenance provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server This chapter also includes a description on relocating and storing the server Chapter 8 Troubleshooting contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor optional memory optional add in cards hard disk drives peripheral devices and power supply Appendix A Specification provides specifications for your server Appendix B Other Precautions provides supplementary notes on using the server Appendix IRQ and I O Port Address provides a list of factory set IRQs and I O port addresses assigned Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003 See Chapter 5 for details Appendix E Installing Windows 2000 describes how to install Microsoft Windows 2000 without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows 2000 See Chapter 5 for details
206. ing a device and pressing Enter The following sub menu appears SCSI ID 4 xxxxxxxxx Firmware XXXX XXX Capacity xxGB Format Disk Verify Disk Media The following table lists submenu items and descriptions Submenu item Description O O Z O O OOOO O Format Disk Formats the selected device in the raw level Verifies all the sectors in the selected device If one or more bad sectors are found reassigns the sectors Verify Disk Media 4 44 Configuring Your Server Configuring SCSI Controller on Optional Board To configure SCSI devices connected to an optional SCSI controller board use the SCSI BIOS utility provided with the optional SCSI controller board Refer to the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller board for details When the server has multiple SCSI controller boards installed the server first displays the start up message of the SCSISe ect utility for the SCSI controller on the baseboard It then displays the utility start up message for additional SCSI controllers one by one The start up message appears for the SCSI controller board in the PCI 1 slot first then PCI 2 On board PCI 3 PCI 4 PCI 5 PCI 6 PCI 7 and finally PCI 8 The message displayed may vary depending on the optional SCSI controller board Refer to the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller board for details Configuring Your Server 4 45 CONFIGURING BASEBOARD JUMPERS With the pre
207. ional board NOTE Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the slot in which you are going to install the PCI board is off 4 Push the tab at the tip of the additional slot cover of the slot in which you are going to install the PCI board to unlock the tab Open the tab IMPORTANT Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more Doing so could damage the tab 5 Remove the expansion slot cover IMPORTANT Keep the removed expansion slot cover in a designated place 6 Remove the dust cover IMPORTANT Keep the removed dust cover in a designated place 7 Push the PCI board until the correction part of the board is firmly connected into the slot IMPORTANT If failing to install the PCI board correctly reinstall it Be careful not to apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it Applying excess force may cause damage to the PCI board Lock for long card Upgrading Your Server 9 33 NOTES m The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots They are for protecting the PCI board already been installed Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the PCI board If the insulator is taken off reinstall the insulator in place After installed the long board secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail 8 Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand 9 10 11 Slowly close
208. is page is intentionally left blank Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM that comes with your server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 6 2 Installing and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 1s an automated software integration tool to help simplify the process of installing and configuring your server Shipped with all NEC servers the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM provides a flexible guided installation process for system administrators to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows 2000 Server or other operating systems contact your service representative for the server certified operating systems NOTE Before using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup complete the hardware configuration NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes three distinct programs Two can be booted under DOS for initial setup and one is for use under Windows operating system m DOS based with local console Used to set up the server at the first time This program is also used to diagnose the server and to install uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partition of the system drive NEC Expresebs00 NEC EXPEESSBUILDER Vers xxxe Copyright iCINEC CorporationZ003 perre pere Ss i Express Setup refers to the method unique to the system the internal parameters
209. ive authority e g Administrator and insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Setup Software in Master Control Menu screen appears so left click the item Click Update the System from the menu and the setup will start After that follow the message to continue the setup process Making Backup Copies of System Information The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server Save the information after completing the system setup Without the backup data you will not be able to recover the information You can save the information by the following process 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and reboot the system Select Tools Select Off line Maintenance Utility Select System Information Management Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive 2 a oS SS Select Save 5 20 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Exceptional Setup This section explains how to setup by the exceptional way You usually do not have to do as follows The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass Storage Device Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup If you would like to install or re install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not to be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER you have to set as follows 1 Read the manual supplied with the
210. k 1f the additionally installed PCI board is recognized and operating properly 1 Select Control Panel Administractive Tools Computer Management and Device Manager in the order to start the Device Manager 2 Move the cursor to the added board Computer Management ol x Action View e 9 Tree kS m Computer amp Disk drives Display adapters 5 DYD CD ROM drives 3 Floppy disk controllers amp Floppy disk drives G3 IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Computer Management Local i System Tools Fa Event Viewer System Information amp Performance Logs and Alerts Shared Folders 4 Device Manager A E 3 Keyboards Local U dG eae eee D Mice and other pointing devices ij Storage monitors Oe C Disk Management lt 3 Disk Defragmenter E Logical Drives Removable Storage E Th Services and Applications 8 Network adapters SF Intel R PRO 100 5 Server Adapter EF Intel R PRO 100 5 Server Adapter 2 aF Ports COM amp LPT SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers m System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers F FE 9 44 Upgrading Your Server 3 Display the General dialog in the property to confirm that the devi
211. k Start menu and click Windows Explorer The procedure in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run PROSet exe in the following directory CD ROM DriveLetter WINNT DOTNET BC1 1 PROSet WS03 XP32 The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Choose Typical and click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish ey aw Se OS e Restart the system D 10 Installing Windows Server 2003 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears The procedure in the case of the standard start menu 1 Click Start menu Click Control Panel Click Network Connections and Click Local Area Connection The procedure in the case of the classic start menu 1 Click Start menu Click Settings and Click Network Connections The Network Connections dialog box appears 2 Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu 2 Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears 3 Click the Advanced and specify the
212. le used is The system will not be affect by these event logs SNMP will not be affected either so that you can ignore these logs Troubleshooting 8 31 A PCI board is not recognized C Is the PCI board installed correctly Confirm that the PCI board is installed in the slot correctly __ Is the proper IRQ assigned for the board Assign the proper IRQ by referring to the Chapter 4 O Is Disabled specified in Option ROM for the slot to install SCSI card excluding the array board used for OS boot Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility lt Menus to check Advanced PCI Configuration PCI Slot n n PCI slot number of installed board Option ROM Scan gt Is Disabled specified in Option ROM for the slot for added network board which is not used for network boot Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility lt Menus to check Advanced PCI Configuration PCI Slot n n PCI slot number of installed board Option ROM Scan gt PCI hot plug fails _ Is BIOS configuration correct You must change the BIOS configuration to use the PCI hot plug feature lt Menus to check Advanced PCI Configuration Hot Plug PCI Control Minimum Middle Maximum gt Setting value depends on the board to be installed See Chapter 4 for details lt Menus to check Advanced PCI Configuration Hot Plug PCI Control Empty Bus Default Speed PC
213. led specification of the protocol are all set by default e g Specified IP Address on TCP IP but DHCP is specified Are you specifying more than two protocols In this case the situation will be the same as connecting more than two Network adapter so the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by default Re specify the details from Control Panel after starting the OS 8 36 Troubleshooting Error Message during Disk Array Configuration Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for any trouble occurred on disk array in this system Problems with Master Control Menu The master control menu fails to appear C Is your system Windows NT 4 0 or later or Windows 95 or later The Master Control menu is supported by Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 95 C Is Shift pressed Setting the CD ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature C Is the system in the proper state gt The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing to set the CD ROM In such a case start the Explorer and run MC 1ST EXE in the CD ROM Troubleshooting 8 37 Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator lt Common to Windows 2000 gt The bit map of the Configuration Diskette Creator window is not displayed correctly during setting of setup information When the Trekking command is used Ifthe specified number of colors is fewer than 256 in the display setting the bit map
214. ler that controls the UPS connect the power cord to an SWITCH OUT outlet For constant power supply connect the power cord to a UN SWITCH OUT outlet Connect the modem that is in service for 24 hours to this outlet lt Example gt UN SWITCH OUT SWITCH OUT OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 When the power cord from the server to a UPS change the BIOS setup of the server to link with power supply from the UPS Change a parameter for AC LINK under the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility See Chapter 4 for details Setting Up Your Server 3 35 TURNING ON THE SERVER Turn on the server and follow the on screen instructions for setup IMPORTANT Before turning on the server Some optional boards require setups with the SETUP utility before installation Ifthe server has a PCI board with the PCI to PCI bridge installed the SETUP utility is enabled to launch Check on the board specifications to find out whether it requires pre installation setups before actually installing the board Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral devices require setups before proceeding to the next step To use the server with no optional devices installed besides the graphic board install a desired OS to the server 1 Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the CD ROM drive contains no bootable CD ROM 2 Press the POWER switch NOTES m If the power cord is connected to the power control unit
215. ller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK 8 Specify the following driver and click Next INITIO INI A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller When N8103 65F board is installed Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP Ultra320 SCSI When N8103 75 board is installed The installation of the driver 1s completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen 5 34 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Setting for Solving Problems Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur Memory Dump Debug Information This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump debug information in the server IMPORTANT Cautions for the Memory Dump m The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of collecting memory dump Customers need only to specify the memory dump m If any trouble occur after specifying the process below the message to inform that the system is in short of virtual me
216. log box x OS language Engish 7 Cancel Disk setup Help a RAD J Greate new RAID Total number of attached drives fi Number of drives in drive group fi Raid3 Y RAID Level Write Mode Automatic setting 4 Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click on Next NOTE If you click on Cancel all the input value will be deleted 5 When User and application setup is displayed check Apply OEM FD for mass storage device User and application setup x r Application setting J NEC ESMPRO Agent Details I Global Array Manager Jetails etails Il FastCheck I Power Console Plus Adaptec Storage Manager Browser Edition AMA F Express Report Service m User and Group creation New group Create New user Create cm e 6 When the Save Setup Information dialog box is displayed confirm that the Configuration Diskette check box is checked and input file name for the Setup File in File Name 7 Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1 44MB into the floppy disk drive and click on OK Installing and Using Utilities 6 19 NEC ESMPRO The NEC ESMPRO referred to as ESMPRO hereafter lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations failures and performance With log data collected by ESMPRO a system adminis
217. low of the setup operated by Express Setup _ Process that continues automatically COo Process that need to input or select EXPRESSBUILI Read notes and restrictions Go back Confirmed Select how to install oC F Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Confirmed Select Setup Parameter File v New File v Existing File Select OS Check Setup Parameter File Correct Terminate Retrieve again If you need to reset the specification Incorrect Confirm the setting select whether or not to modify Confirm the specification and input the value E Re select Disk Array Configuration 1 Restart l Creating Maintenance Partition Insert Windows CD ROM C Agree Software License Agreement Express Setup l Log on Automatically After restarting the computer the installation completed J Restart l Installing Utilities Restart 2 Creating OS Partition l Restart l Formatting OS Partition l Copying NEC Modules l Copying Selected Application Modules 1 The process is operated only when Disk Array Controller Board is connected and the configuration is specified 2 If you select Others the process is completed here 5 8 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Installing the Windows Server 2003 This section describes on how to setup the system using
218. ly pull the power supply unit out of the power supply bay IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the power supply unit do not tilt or twist the unit as you pull it from the power supply bay The module disengaging from its connector causes the initial resistance you will feel Use even steady force to remove the unit Locking tab Handle POWER lamp 9 14 Upgrading Your Server 5 Ifyou are not going to install a replacement power supply unit you must install a blank cover you removed in step 2 of installation procedure to vacant slot IMPORTANT To maintain the cooling effect in the server install the blank cover in the vacant slot of the power supply bay 6 Install the new power supply unit taking steps 3 to 7 of Installation and confirm that the power supply unit is installed normally NOTE If one of the three power supply units of the server is replaced while the power is on the POWER lamp of the new power supply unit goes on If it is replaced while the power is off the lamp goes on after the power is turned on Upgrading Your Server 9 15 Server Extending from the Rack Cabinet The server needs to be pulled out from the rack for installing removing any components other than the hard disk drives and power supply units 44 CAUTION A Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow AN these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 A to 1 8 f
219. ma 5 JONR L m a a aaan anaana TT Timm BDO panpe p a ee ll aie BE j D m mj a G El al lal la Al JAI JA B J8 JA JB IA B o o O D D O o o oO oO Oo 0 oO 0 Oo Oo Oo 0 O D O O O D O O Do Oo Ff A A a a f z AA f A A A A a a a Oo o o o o o o o o 0O O O O O O O O O B Al Al a E Al B Ai 7 CEEL C 90000 ma PCI Slot Power Lamp The PCI slot power lamp lights in green when a PCI board is installed in the slot and powered up PCI Slot Fault Lamp This lamp is available only when the operation system is Windows 2000 If the driver of a Hot Plug PCI board is stopped under Windows 2000 and then the PCI board is logically disconnected from the system PCI slot fault lamp blinks in amber If an error occurred on PCI board or the slot installed the PCI board this lamp lights in amber Troubleshooting 8 13 FAN Fault Lamps FAN Fault lamp is adjacent to each fan module These lamps are triangular in shape and point to their respective fans When the cooling fan is functioning normally the lamp does not light When a fan is not functioning normally the lamp lights in red A cooling fan failure is also indicated by the status lamp located on the front panel The failed fan may be hot s
220. ming with the device carefully Setting Up Your Server 3 33 CONNECTING POWER CORD Connect the provided power cord to the server A WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details m Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source m Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections m Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes m Use the authorized power cord only Plug the provided power cord into the AC inlet on the rear of the server Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet Secure the power cord with a lock spring 3 34 Setting Up Your Server To connect the power cord from the server to an interruptive power supply UPS use service outlets on the rear of the UPS The UPS service outlets are categorized into two groups SWITCH OUT and UN SWITCH OUT They may be called OUTPUTI1 and OUTPUT2 To control power supply with an application NEC ESMPRO UPSControl
221. mory may appear but continue to start the system If you re start the system in such case memory dump may not be stored correctly Follow the procedure below to specify 1 Point to Settings in Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears 2 Double click System The System Properties dialog box appears Click Advanced Click Startup and Recovery Enter the location to write the debug information to the text box e g Write the debug information in D drive with the file name MEMORY DMP D MEMORY DMP Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 35 IMPORTANT m To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead m Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 12MB m Incase the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive Click Performance Options Click Change on the Virtual Memory dialog box Modify Initial Size in the Paging File Size f
222. mory mounted is 2048MB 12MB If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if the mounted memory size is 512MB the minimally required partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 1000MB 512MB 1 5 512MB 12MB 2292MB NOTES If you want to install using Express Setup calculate the minimally required partition size as follows If you do not apply Windows 2000 Service Pack The larger value of either one Minimum Partition Size described above or 4095MB If you want to apply Windows 2000 Service Pack The larger value of either one Minimum Partition Size described above 850MB or 4095MB 5 24 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Re installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk You cannot re install Windows 2000 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained If you want to keep the current partition remained see Appendix D to re install the system Disk Configuration Concerning the area displayed as MAINTE_P In disk area an area displayed as MAINTE P may exist This area is maintenance partition for saving configuration information and utilities Do not delete the area Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 25 The Flow of Setup This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated b
223. mpleted during Express Setup If these 2 inputs are done correctly there is no problem on Windows 2000 setup Troubleshooting 8 35 Unable to specify the details of Network adapter In Express Setup you can not specify the details of Network adapter Specify them from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000 Windows 2000 is started with Network adapter that has not been specified during Express Setup Windows 2000 will install the recognized Network adapter specified as default value If you want to modify the specification it can be done from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000 Also the Network adapter that has been specified during Express Setup but that is not connected will not be setup though the protocol will only be installed Connected more than two Network adapter and specified different protocol for each adapter but all the protocols are specified on either adapter It sadesign Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be used The value that can not be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by default value When more than two Network adapter are specified the detailed specification of TCP IP protocol are all set to use DHCP When more than two Network adapter are specified the detailed specification of the protocol may all be set by default value Re specify the details from Control Panel Not more than two Network adapter is connected but the detai
224. n Diskette Creator This section describes about installing Configuration Diskette Creator on the computer that 1s running with Windows XP 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 3 51 and Windows 95 98 Me to create Configuration Diskette NOTE Configuration Diskette Creator works on PC AT compatible computers Windows XP 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Me Follow the procedure below to install Configuration Diskette Creator on the computer that is running with Windows XP 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Me NOTE The instructions displayed on the screen may differ according to the model you are using but setup can be operated with the same procedure 1 Start the OS 2 Insert the attached NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Master Control Menu will appear Installing and Using Utilities 6 15 3 Right click on the screen or left click Software Setup The menu will appear G NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Master Control Menu e xi Oo Online Document NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC Express5800 Series Master Control Menu Setup N O Quit Copyright NEC Corporation N EC 4 Click Configuration Diskette Creator Setup Wizard will start Follow the message to continue the installation Welcome E xj Welcome to the Configuration Diskette Creater Setup program This program will install Configuration Diskette Creater on your computer It is strongly rec
225. n if a DIMM begin to fail When a pre defined threshold for the maximum number of correctable ECC errors has been exceeded online spare memory initializes the bank in standby spare bank and takes over the failing memory bank The memory bank that exceeds the error threshold can be replaced at the customer s convenience during a scheduled shut down With online spare memory degraded memory is automatically disengaged and a fresh set of memory is used in its place This brings the reliability of the system to the pre failure level without any service interruption and without compromising system availability To enable online sparing memory feature it is necessary to install the DIMMs in group 1 or in group 1 and group 2 for a normal operation and to install the DIMMs in group 3 for standby General Description 2 17 SAF TE Logic The SCSI backplane includes SAF TE SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosure logic that provides an interface to the disk subsystem that supports status signals hot swapping drives and enclosure monitoring The transport mechanism for the standardized alert detection and status reporting 1s the SCSI bus Disk drives power supplies cooling fans and temperature are continually monitored and the conditions then reported over the SCSI bus to the system When used with RAID management software the user can be alerted of impending or imminent disk conditions requiring attention This allows the user to react to
226. n this model The server supports the following edition m Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Described as Windows Server 2003 from now on m Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Described as Windows Server 2003 from now on On installing other OS contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver To install optional mass storage driver see Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Configuration Diskette Creator in Chapter 6 to create setup inf file BIOS Specification Before installing Windows Server 2003 confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct See Chapter 4 to specify them NEC ESMPRO Agent On Windows Server 2003 systems the ESMPRO Agent needs the necras sys driver To install the necras sys run the System update from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 5 Windows Server 2003 Express Setup can install Windows Server 2003 operating system However note the following issue IMPORTANT Before starting the installation complete all the process of adding the optional device and the setup of Express server mainframe BIOS and optional board specification The document for installing Windows Server 2003 is also attached to the other software package which is sold separately from NEC but refer to this document when you install Windows Server 2003 on this mod
227. nation described in the manual for the option and press any key After power on POST is activated to start the memory check The message indicating the counted size of the base memory and that of the additional memory appears at the upper left corner of the display screen In addition the following message appears at the bottom of the screen Press lt ESC gt to enter boot selection menu lt Space gt to abort memory test Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP lt F4 gt Service Partition lt F12 gt Network NOTE Pressing Space under the display of message lt Space gt to abort memory test allows the memory test to be skipped It may take several minutes to complete the memory check depending on the size of the memory installed in the server Similarly it may take about a minute to display the proper information on the screen at rebooting Detects the SCSI controller built in the server and displays the message prompting the start of the SCSI BIOS setup utility without any key entry for several seconds POST is automatically continued Press the proper keys according to the screen display Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for SCSISelect TM utility Now press Ctrl A to start the utility See Chapter 4 for the setting procedures and features of the parameters For example the SCSI BIOS setup utility must be used in the following cases m Installation of an SCSI device in the 5 25 inch device bay m Connection of an external SCSI device
228. nce Utility NEC ESMPRO to the server and client computers 8 2 Troubleshooting SYSTEM VIEWERS Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation Especially take note on whether any alert 1s reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the language PC Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window Data Viewer or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager Example le Edt Yew Tools Options Helo eee aces ea 5 E Operation Window USA comm1 Bile Edit View Tools Options Help lelea xt Sle alsa ae il My Community conmt S Intemet jperation Window Head_Office comm1 Zle Edt Vew Tools Options Helo Jest Pe ee ca esd ea ce ea eal My Community comm i nterret a USA ih Seatle Je la acory1 mA Srancht alik San Francisco alah Sall_Lake_Cty 1 l 2nd_Development_Division alak Los_Angels ea New_York H ik Miemi p wf JAPAN cm oar j a z E E R T H EC wie NetWareServer NEC ESMPRO Manager is Operation Window 2nd_Development_Division comm1 ta EEE Bile Edt View Tools Options Help Ele Edit Yiew Tools Help Atel te el Seal ii x 2 ape SLE My Cormunity commt SH Intemet Severity All Component All x usA iat Seatle 5 IM Head fice tedsecurity
229. nd accessories from the chipping carton box Assembling the rack mount system Assemble the 19 inch rack cabinet and install the server Connecting peripheral devices Connect peripheral devices to the server Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord to the server Turning on the server Power on the server to start software setups Setups depend on the optional internal devices installed and the peripheral devices connected Installing the operating system Install an operating system to the server See Chapter 5 Installing the utilities Install the utilities in the provided NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM See Chapter 6 Making backup copies of system information After all the system setup procedures are completed make backup copies of system information System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after replacing the system board Setting Up Your Server 3 3 SELECTING A SITE Installation Your server unit should be mounted in a standard EIA 19 inch rack cabinet Installation of Rack Refer to the documentation attached to the rack or contact your service representative for rack installation of the server unit 4a WARNING Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not use the server in any unapproved
230. nd carefully If the server is locked on the way push the server slowly with the depression of the release lever on each of the left and right sides Bearing rail Slide rail assembly Plastic portions Inner rail Mating portion lt q Q Q Q Q QO Q Q Q lO Q Q a IAs Q A LJ Q O o Q lO D o Q D D o x Release lever IMPORTANT Push each release lever using a driver or a similar tool Pushing a release lever with your fingers may cause the fingers to be caught and thus injured 3 16 Setting Up Your Server NOTE The slide rail assembly installed in the rack contains a slide rail called the bearing rail The bearing rail can be moved freely in the slide rail assembly To install the server in the rack securely slide the bearing rail to the front of the rack to put the plastic components at the tip of the rail and the inner rail into the server At the first installation you may feel strong friction in pushing because the mechanical components cannot be completely engaged with each other Push the server intensely NOTE While the server is pushed into the rack the server may be locked and thus cannot be pushed any more This is because the lock lever on the rail prohibits the server from being pushed into the rack any more Set the lock lever to be on the level to release the lock and then push the server into the rack slowly 1J a aN sta 15 Install the cable arm
231. ndows 2000 E 11 Graphics Accelerator Driver Standard graphics accelerator driver that are mounted will be installed automatically The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board follow the document attached to the board to install the driver 1 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Run Setup exe in the following directory lt CD ROM Drive Letter gt WINNT W2K VIDEO setup exe Follow the message on the screen When the message Digital Signature Not Found message appears click on Yes Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and restart the system following a message on the screen Installing SCSI Controller Driver If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 65F 75 install it according to the following procedure 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu gt Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from an
232. nected to the IDE device a built in option installed on the 5 25 inch device bay For the device installed on the 5 25 inch device bay set the operation mode MASTER SLAVE to SLAVE for the setting see the manual coming with the device Connect the proper cables to the baseboard CD ROM drive and option devices in the order CD ROM drive normally installed The operation mode is set to MASTER IDE connector Optional device IDE The operation mode is set to SLAVE 9 64 Upgrading Your Server SCSI Interface This section describes the connection pattern of the SCSI interface Baseboard Two Ultra 320 SCSI connectors are installed on the baseboard The Ultra 320 SCSI A connector is connected to the 3 5 inch hard disk bay in the normal status The SCSI B connector is provided to connect with the built in option installed in the 5 25 inch device bay or an external SCSI device When the server is delivered the SCSI B connector is connected with the cable for using the 5 25 inch device bay To use an external SCSI device it 1s necessary to connect the SCSI cable coming with the server instead be unique in the daisy chain connection The termination setting should be valid for the furthest device SCSI B connector To external SCSI SCSI cable for 5 25 inch device 3 5 inch disk bay Because both the external and 5 25 inch device SCSI cables SCSI A connector Set SCSI IDs to IDO should b
233. ng or removing a hard disk on or from the 3 5 inch hard disk bay first remove the front bezel IMPORTANT The front bezel can be opened only when you unlock it by using the attached security key 1 Insert the attached security key into the key slot and turn the key to the front bezel side with it pressed lightly to release the lock Hold the right end of the front bezel lightly to pull it toward you Slide the front bezel to the left a little to remove the tab from the frame and then remove the front bezel from the server lt pomini gt L L gt Q Unlock Lock To install the front bezel latch the tab at the left side of the front bezel on the server frame After the installation lock the front bezel by using the key for security 2 26 General Description POWER Switch Use the POWER switch to turn on off the server Power On Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis The POWER SLEEP lamp lights in green POWER SLEEP lamp POWER switch Ta 102022010 IMPORTANT m If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a UPS Uninterruptive Power Supply make sure that the power control device is powered m Ifthe power cord is connected to the server an initial diagnosis of the hardware starts The POWER switch does not work while in diagnosis Wait for about 10 seconds then press the POWER switch m Do not turn off the server until characters followi
234. ng the NEC logo appears on the screen General Description 2 27 POST POST Power On Self Test is the self diagnosis feature saved in the baseboard of the server When the power of the server is turned on POST automatically runs to check the baseboard memory board CPU keyboard and mouse During POST messages indicating the starts of several BIOS setup utilities may also appear At the shipment of the server it is set to have the NEC logo appear on the display unit during POST Pressing Esc allows the information on the execution of POST to be displayed NOTE The information on the result of diagnosis by POST can be displayed from the start without the depression of Esc on the BIOS menu If you desire it change the setting of Boot time Diagnosis Screen on Advanced of the BIOS configuration to Enabled It may not always necessary to check the result of POST Check the messages which may appear during POST in the following cases m Installation of the server Suspicion of failure Beep for many times in the period from power on to OS start m Appearance of an error message on the display unit 2 28 General Description POST Flow The flow of operations executed by POST is sequentially described below 1 IMPORTANT Depending on the system configuration message Press Any Key requesting key entry may appear on the display screen This is requested by BIOS on an installed optional board See the expla
235. ng the rebuild processing the lamp is lit green or amber alternately This occurs only in the disk array configuration 2 6 General Description Front View Switches and Lamps See Chapter 8 for detail information on lamp indication 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 Serial port B connector The serial port B connector is used to connect the server to a device with the serial interface The server cannot be directly connected to a leased line through the connector IMPORTANT Only the RJ 45 serial interface cable can be connected to this port Do not connect any other interface cables such as the Ethernet cable Doing so could damage the device your server or both USB3 connector The USB3 connector allows the server to be connected to a device accepting the USB interface SLEEP switch Pressing the sleep switch once causes the server to enter into the sleep state power saving mode Pressing the power switch in the sleep state recovers the machine to the normal state This function is supported by Windows 2000 UID Unit ID switch Pressing the UID switch turns UID lamp blue located on the front panel and the rear panel on and off The UID lamp located on the rear panel is visible through the rear of the chassis and allows you to locate the server you re working on from the rear of the servers on a rack UID lamp blue Lights in blue when the ID switch is pressed RESET switch The reset switch is used to reset t
236. nment This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a management PC m Hardware Machine NEC Express5800 series PC AT compatible machine which contains Intel Pentium or a CPU at least equivalent to it Memory Size large enough for OS operation 8MB or more Free space of the hard disk 5 MB or more Display unit Screen size 1024 x 768 or larger Required peripheral equipment Network Interface card CD ROM unit Pointing device such as a mouse Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or storing the server MAKING BACKUP COPIES It is recommended that you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server on aregular basis For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools consult with your service representative When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration select System Information Management and then Save of the Off line Maintenance Utility to make a backup copy of the system information Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the array configuration When your hard disks have been auto rebuilt due to a failure 1t is recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data To make a backup copy of the configuration data use the configuration utility that is resident
237. nstallation if you do not have Configuration Diskette specified in advance but one floppy disk formatted by MS DOS 1 44MB is necessary also in such case For Configuration Diskette use the blank disk in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER package or prepare other floppy disk personally IMPORTANT Ifyou modified the system configuration execute System Update If you want to modify or add Graphics Accelerator Driver or the drivers of Network Adapter and so on see Appendix D Turn the power of peripheral device on and then turn on the server Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty ee ween foe Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the CD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts 5 Click Express Setup Note will be displayed 6 Read the instruction carefully and click OK The message Insert Configuration Diskette appears 7 Insert Configuration Diskette into the floppy disk drive and click OK NOTE If you do not have Configuration Diskette insert a blank floppy disk formatted by 1 44MB into the floppy disk drive and click OK Make sure not to remove the Configuration Diskette from the floppy disk drive until the message that allow you to remove it appeared Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
238. o the drive You can insert the keyed connectors only one way IMPORTANT m The built in SCSI cable previously has wide narrow conversion connector Remove the wide narrow conversion connectors from the SCSI cable and connect the SCSI connector appropriate for the devices if the 5 25 inch device has 68 pin SCSI connector Keep the removed wide narrow conversion connector carefully Connector pin bending or incomplete connection may cause a malfunction to occur Provide the connection securely watching the 5 25 inch device and cable connectors Connector cover is attached to the power cable Keep the removed connector cover for future use NOTE Make sure that the cables are not caught while the 5 25 inch device is pushed into the slot Ultra 320 B connector Interface cable Device Power cable 12 Install the components you removed previously 13 Make the setup according to SCSI BIOS in Chapter 4 Upgrading Your Server 9 21 Removal Remove the device in reverse order of the installation steps IMPORTANT m To remove a cable from the signal connector pull out the cable with holding the pull tab on the cable connector Pulling out the cable with holding the cable may make some pins bent and or some internal wires disconnected This may cause a malfunction to occur m Ifyou leave the 5 25 inch device bay empty install a dummy cover on the bay for proper cooling and airflow Installing a device in the
239. o the unused connector of standard CD ROM drive cable Set the device as Slave using the jumper pin of the device Refer to the manual coming with the IDE device for details Installation See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Open the front access cover Remove the drive from its protective wrapper and place it on an antistatic surface Record the new drive model and serial numbers in your equipment log ee Se E Set any jumpers or switches on the new drive according to the drive manufacturer s instructions Upgrading Your Server 9 19 7 While pressing the locking tabs on the both sides of the dummy cover pull the dummy cover out of the server o Fair MINNN ma pn nT ea tt 1 tiin M aa it 9 Tighten the two mounting screws coming with the server to secure a latching rail to each side of the drive IMPORTANT m Use the bottom raw screw holes on the latching rail see figure below m Always use the screws coming with the server Using longer screws or those of different diameter may cause the device to be broken 9 20 Upgrading Your Server 10 Position the drive with the left side lower so that the latching rails engage the guide rails in the 5 25 inch device bay Push the drive into the bay until the latching rails lock in place 11 Connect the signal and power cables t
240. off 3 Power off peripheral devices 2 32 General Description SLEEP Switch The SLEEP switch allows you to save almost all power of the server power saving mode or sleep mode NOTE To use the SLEEP switch an OS supporting the sleep feature is required Available for Windows 2000 SLEEP switch POWER SLEEP lamp Ta 1 202 0 0 Press the SLEEP switch on the front of the server to place the server in the power saving mode The POWER SLEEP lamp blinks In the power saving mode the server retains the memory data and the status of the previous operations To resume the original state press the POWER switch It may take a little time to resume the original state NOTE The operational level in the power saving mode depends on the OS in use Available for Windows 2000 IMPORTANT Do not change system configuration while turning into the power saving mode or in the power saving mode Otherwise you may fail to resume the original state General Description 2 33 Floppy Disk Drive Your server is provided with the 3 5 inch floppy disk drive on its front to write read data to from a floppy disk Your server supports the following 3 5 inch floppy disks m 2HD floppy disk double sided high density track type Stores data of 1 44MB m 2DD floppy disk double sided double density track type Store data of 720KB Make sure that the server is powered the POWER SLEEP lamp is lit before inserting a
241. og lt Reboot gt Restarts the Express Server 8 Select lt Reboot gt in the End user Menu above The Express Server restarts and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boot the system 9 Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive 10 Turn off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle 11 Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server 12 Plug the power code This completes the System Diagnostics Maintenance 7 11 RELOCATING STORING THE SERVER Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server 44 CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details VA A m Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself Do not install the server in any place other than specified m Do not connect disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source IMPORTANT m Ifthe server needs to be relocated stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great extent contact the service representative m Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk if any m Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disks to relocated the server if the contains any m It is recommended that the server and the internal devices should be stored in a place where the room temperature can be maintained It is im
242. oling as well as use precaution when handling internal components immediately after powering down Some internal components may sti be operational on battery power Refer to instruction manuals for this system as well as options prior to maintenance Notes on Using Your Server 1 3 SAFETY NOTES This section provides notes on using your server safely Read this section carefully to ensure proper and safe use of the server For symbols see SAFETY INDICATIONS provided earlier General A WARNING SO Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly affect human lives Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices concerning human lives including medical devices nuclear facilities and devices aeronautics and space devices transportation facilities and devices and facilities and devices requiring high reliability NEC assumes no liability for any accident resulting in personal injury death or property damage if the server has been used in the above conditions If smoke odor or noise is present immediately turn off the POWER switch and disconnect the power plug from the outlet then contact your service A Do not use the server if any smoke odor or noise is present representative Using the server in such conditions may cause a fire Keep needles or metal objects away from the server Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventila
243. ollowing procedure 1 Orient the duct so that the two release tabs are toward the rear of the chassis 2 With the rear of the air duct raised insert the tab on the front of the air duct into the slot in the chassis The duct must be at an angle of at least 30 for the tab to engage correctly 3 Holding the AC inlet and attached cords clear rotate the rear end of the duct down Adjust the position of the duct until it falls into place Do not force it down IMPORTANT Do not hit on the ICMB board mounted at the rear of the chassis while rotating the duct ICMB board Release tab Processor board air duct AC inlet o 0m00000 Q eJ O Move the AC inlet into place and attach it using the screw 2 3 Reinstall all parts removed in removal procedures 9 56 Upgrading Your Server Processor Board To install or remove the processor CPU remove the processor board Removal Remove the processor board in the following procedure IMPORTANT The processor board is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the processor board Do not touch the processor board terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place the processor board directly on the desk For static notes see the section Anti static Measures described earlier See the section Preparing for Installation an
244. ollowing process 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and reboot the system Select Tools Select Off line Maintenance Utility Select System Information Management Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive 2S SS Select Save Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 39 Exceptional Setup This section explains how to setup by the exceptional way You usually do not have to do as follows The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass Storage Device Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup If you would like to install or re install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not to be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER you have to set as follows 1 Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server 2 Ifthe mass storage device is disk array controller configure the RAID system before running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 3 Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM a When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears check Use Existing Array b Check Apply OEM FD for Mass storage device 5 Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive Continue the ExpressSetup referring to messages displayed on the display 5 40 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Th
245. om the rack Remove the front access cover Remove the rear access cover If you are going to install the disk array controller on the PCI slot 3 or 4 remove the CPU access cover Install the disk array controller See PCI board in Installation of options to check the board installation position and install the board Loosen the two screws with which the fan unit is fixed 9 66 Upgrading Your Server 7 Lift the fan unit straight to pull out it from the main unit LEE N Upgrading Your Server 9 67 9 Connect the SCSI cable removed in step 8 to the disk array controller 12 13 Route the SCSI cable through the point shown in the figure below when it is routed below the guide rail for the PCI board 10 11 Install the removed parts Turn on the power of the server to confirm that no error message does not appear in POST If an error message appears write down the message and see the error message listed in Chapter 8 Start the BIOS setup utility to set Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu to YESS It is required to update the hardware configuration information See Chapter 4 for details Configure the system by using proper utilities See the online document stored in CD ROM EXPRESSBUILDER coming with the server or the manual coming with the disk array controller 9 68 Upgrading Your Server Disk array configuration of disk expansion units The N8141 3
246. omatically is specified In such case restart the system manually Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen execute forced power off forced shut down continue to press POWER switch for 4 seconds The power will not be turned off if you press the switch just one time Troubleshooting 8 29 The server is not found on the network LJ Is the LAN cable connected Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server Also make sure that the LAN cable to use conforms with the network interface standard L Is BIOS configuration correct The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility lt Menus to check Advanced PCI Configuration Embedded NIC 1 Embedded NIC 2 gt C Have the protocol and service already configured Install the distinctive network driver for the server Make sure that the protocol such as TCP IP and services are properly specified C Is the transfer speed correct Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB The processor name displayed in General tab of System Property is not in correct position There is no problem for operation The system displays the message below and fails to log in
247. ommand and the EMP function can be used This is nota fatal error Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative BMC SDR Repository empty Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 8 18 Troubleshooting Error code Error message Recommended Action OB94 IPMB signal lines do not respond All the functions other than the function of accessing to SMC through IPMB can be used This is not a fatal error Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative OB95 BMC FRU device failure All the commands and functions other than the FRU command and the EMP function can be used This is nota fatal error Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative OB96 BMC SDR Repository failure Turn off the power once and then on again to OB97 BMC SEL device failure start the server If the error cannot be 0B98 BMC RAM test error corrected contact your service representative OB9C BMC internal exception 0B9D BMC A D timeout error OB9E SDR repository corrupt OBBO SMBIOS SROM data read error Contact your service representative
248. ommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any Programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Cancel NOTE It is not necessary to input Serial Number on User Information dialog box User Information g xj Type your name below You must also type the name of bea company you work for and the product serial number Name USER Company NEC Serial __tance After completing the Configuration Diskette Creator installation proceed to Creating Configuration Diskette 6 16 Installing and Using Utilities Creating Configuration Diskette This section describes about specifying setup information that is necessary for OS installation and creating Configuration Diskette Follow the procedure below NOTE In the procedure below the folder name that is specified when installing Trekking command is assumed as Configuration Diskette Creator 1 Display Configuration Diskette Creator window lt On Windows XP 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows 95 98 Me gt From the Start pop up menu click Program gt Config
249. on screen message and contact your service representative Problems with Server No screen display appears with beep 0 Are DIMMs installed securely Check whether DIMMs are connected to the mating connectors firmly Check whether DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the specific group See Chapter 9 for the specifications of DIMMs Fail to power on the server U Is the server is properly supplied with power Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet or UPS that meets the power specifications for the server Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server Check the power cord for broken shield or bent plugs Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on Ifthe power cord is plugged to a UPS make sure the UPS is powered and it outputs power See the manual that comes with the UPS for details Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS setup utility of the server lt Menu to check Server AC LINK gt _ Did you press the POWER switch Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn on the power the POWER SLEEP lamp lights Troubleshooting 8 23 Fail to power of the server SLEEP switch is disabled E Is the POWER switch or SLEEP switch enabled Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility lt Menu to check Security Power Switch Inhibit gt Is the serv
250. on 4 0 Terminal Server Edition prepare PC and install Management PC component Management PC does not guarantee operation on Client which used Terminal Server Terminal Server Emulator WBT Start Power Console Plus of management PC after the Power On machine that installed Server and Management Server Install the following component in this PC MegaRAID Client m Management server Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and controlled by management PCs Install the following component in one of the servers or management PCs MegaRAID Registration Server Installing and Using Utilities 6 29 Server Setup This section explains Power Console Plus setup in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted Operating Environment This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a server m Hardware Machine NEC Express5800 series connected with the MegaRAID controller array controller Memory Size large enough for OS operation 8MB or more Free space of the hard disk SMB or more Display unit Screen size 1024 x 768 or larger Required peripheral equipment Network Interface card CD ROM unit Pointing device such as a mouse 6 30 Installing and Using Utilities Management PC Setup This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via the network TCP IP Operating Enviro
251. on boards and other components You can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground when handling system components Electronic devices can be easily damaged by static electricity To prevent damage keep them in their protective packaging when they are not installed in your system Checking Components Confirm that the following tools or components are provided to install the server on the rack 3 8 Setting Up Your Server No Item ty Remarks o 1 Frontbezel 1 2 Slide rail assembly L 1 L is stamped on the rail 3 Slide rail assembly R 1 R is stamped on the rail 4 Cablearm o 1i P O 5 Adapterbracket tt a a a Handle R a 1 Use one according to the distance between the Na cis front and rear vertical mounting rails of your rack cabinet Arm stopper 1 11 Template 12 Tie wrap 6 25 cm long 14 ScrewA BL CRIMSx 8 32x6 S O ee E ae CBIMSx5x10x3GF a7 Sorewd e ProMax 18 Washer A 12 M5 14 Assembled with Screw C PIWAx5x15BF Assembled with Screw D Required Tools 2 Phillips screwdriver and flat tip screwdriver are recommended for assembling the rack mount system Setting Up Your Server 3 9 Installation Procedure Install the server on the rack in the following procedure 1 Define the position height at which the server is installed by using templates The templates have the same vertical size as the ser
252. opying the files NOTE You can leave the Windows Server 2003 CD ROM in CD ROM drive If a disk array controller is attached to the device press F6 while a message Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration is on the screen IMPORTANT There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed When the following message is displayed press S Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter A list of SCSI adapters will be displayed D 8 Installing Windows Server 2003 10 Ifthe optional board is installed select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 RAID Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear 11 Update the system 12 Install the driver and make detailed settings SCSI controller N8103 56F If your system has a controller N8103 56F system error will occur during the upgrade installation to Windows 2003 Disconnect SCSI controller and re
253. or Selected Drive box to the value larger than Recommended Size and click Specify IMPORTANT Be sure to create memory dump with the size described above on the OS partition If Default Size of the paging file is specified to the value smaller than Recommended value the correct debug information memory dump may not be collected For more information on Recommended value see Partition Size to be Created described earlier To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred we recommend you to press dump switch to confirm that the dump will be collected normally in advance m Incase the memory is expanded re specify the paging file to suit the new memory size 9 Click OK The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification In such case follow the message to restart the system 5 36 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Windows 2000 Dr Watson Windows 2000 Dr Watson is a debugger for application errors If any application error is detected Dr Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information log Follow the procedure below and specify Dr Watson to collect diagnostic information 1 2 Click Run on Start menu Type drwtsn32 exe in the Open box and click OK The Dr Watson for Windows 2000 dialog box appears Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the Log File Path box The diagnostic inf
254. or details AA Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components Note high temperature Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Loosen the four screws from the front of the server Screws 1000000 0000000 SCO IT Screws LAD ONA gt 3 Hold the flame on the front of the server and slowly pull out the server from the rack The server is latched when a click is heard 9 16 Upgrading Your Server When inserting the server back into the rack push the release levers on the rails on the s
255. or dummy sponge block for this server Upgrading Your Server 9 7 Installation Take the following steps to install a hard disk drive This procedure applies to all the slots NOTE Any hard disk can be installed or removed in or from the server only by removing the front bezel IMPORTANT In the disk array configuration use the same model of hard disk drives See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Locate the slot in which you are going to install a hard disk drive The server has five slots Install hard disk drives in ascending order of the SCSI ID numbers The SCSI IDs assigned to the slots are all determined SCSI ID 0 to ID 4 from right to left 3 Remove the dummy tray IMPORTANT Keep the dummy tray for future use 9 8 Upgrading Your Server 4 Unlock the hard disk drive 5 Firmly hold the additional hard disk drive with the tray provided and handle and align it so that it engages the guide rails in the slot IMPORTANT m Push the hard disk drive until the handle hook butts to the frame m Carefully hold the hard disk drive with both hands 6 Slowly lift the handle The handle is locked when a click is heard IMPORTANT Be careful not to get your finger caught between the handle and tray NOTE Confirm that the handle is hooked to the frame when having inserted the hard disk drive Frame to hang the hook Upgrading Y
256. orced shutdown however is not available if Enable is selected for Power Switch Inhibit on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility SETUP because this setting disables POWER switch operation Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the server 1 Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility SETUP 2 Select Disable for Power Switch Inhibit in the Security menu 3 Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP Troubleshooting 8 41 Saving the Dump File Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs Insert a metal pin a straightened large paper clip will make a substitute into the switch hole to press the DUMP switch ne rO TO DUMP switch Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory Memory dumping may not be available when the CPU stalls IMPORTANT Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break Do not use any pin easily broken such as a toothpick or plastic pin Use apin having the length of 1 inch 25 mm or longer N AA 25 mm or longer is 8 42 Troubleshooting RECOVERY FOR Windows 2000 If any file necessary for running the OS is damaged use the following procedures to recover the system IMPORTANT m After recovering the system see Updating the System in Chapter 5 and be sure to update the system Also on Windows 2000 you need to update all the drivers
257. oring feature is Monitoring Retry Service Boot enabled This item indicates the processing Policy Always Retest at the occurrence of timeout during boot monitoring If Retry 3 times is selected the system is reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS boot is retried up to three times The failure in the third boot causes the boot to be tried from the service partition If Retry Service Boot is selected the system is reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS boot is retried up to three times Then the boot is tried from the service partition for three times If Always Reset is selected the system is reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS boot is retried repeatedly Sensor enabled __ monforng uncon erabesorcesbied Sensor Enabled monitoring function is enabled or disabled BMC IRQ Disabled Indicates the IRQ of the BMC interrupt 5 10 11 Post Error Disabled Indicates whether POST is aborted once at Pause Enabled the end of POST if an error occurs during the execution of POST AC LINK Stay Off Indicates the AC LINK function Shows the Last State state of the power of the server Power On Factory set Configuring Your Server The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on again depending on the setting of AC LINK Setting of AC LINK System status before AC power off Stay Off Last State Operating Off On On Aborting DC p
258. ormation will be stored with the file name DRWTSN32 LOG NOTE You can not specify network pass Specify the pass on local computer Specify the location of crash dump file in the Crash Dump box NOTE Crash Dump File is a binary file that can be read with Windows Debugger Check the following check box on the Option box O Dump Symbol Table O Dump All Thread Contexts O Add To Existing Log File LJ Create Crash Dump File For more information on each function above refer to Online Help Click OK Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 37 Network Monitor Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble To utilize Network Monitor you need to restart the system after the installation has completed so we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur 1 Point to Settings from Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears 2 Double click Add Remove Programs The Add Remove Programs dialog box appears 3 Click Add Remove Windows Component The Windows Components Wizard dialog box appears 4 Check the Management and Monitoring Tools check box of the component ON and click Next 5 Ifthe setup asks to install the disk insert Windows 2000 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and click OK 6 Click Complete in the Windows Component Wizard dialog box 7 Click Close in the Add Remove Appli
259. ot authorized by NEC is not guaranteed Is the cable connection changed The SCSI connector B on the baseboard in the machine can be used for either built in file devices or external SCSI devices The connection to external devices must be switched by modifying cable connection properly See Cable connection in the Hardware Volume for details Are SCSI devices properly configured gt When the server has external SCSI devices connected device settings including SCSI ID and terminator are required Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details Are the SCSI controllers including optional controllers properly configured Use the BIOS setup utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices connected to the SCSI connector on the baseboard When the server has an optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices connected to it use the BIOS setup utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper configuration See the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller for details Cannot install the operating system correctly C Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system See Chapter 6 During Windows 2000 installation the following warning is registered in the System Log of the Event Viewer Error detected on the device Device CdRom0O during the paging operation There is no problem on this issue 8 28 Troubleshooting Fail to start the OS
260. our Server 9 9 7 Power on the server to check to see that the disk lamp on the front of the hard disk drive goes on green IMPORTANT If a hard disk is added to the server operating in RAID1 by using the expand array feature the RAID is automatically changed to RAIDO 1 However it is not possible to set RAID0 1 directly by using a specific utility Removal Remove the hard disk in reverse order of the installation steps 1 to 3 To use the server with the hard disk removed insert a dummy tray into the empty slot NOTE If removing a failing hard disk drive confirm the slot in which the DISK lamp of the hard disk drive is amber before starting the removal DISK lamps N peor S i MoO S 9 10 Upgrading Your Server When the hard disks are in the disk array configuration you can restore the state before an error using the auto rebuild feature that stores the data in the old hard disk into a new one The auto rebuild feature is available for the RAID1 RAIDS or RAIDO 1 disk array configuration Auto rebuild is carried out when you hot swap a failed hard disk with a new one replace the disk while the server is powered While auto rebuild is in progress the DISK lamp flashes green and amber alternatively to indicate it IMPORTANT m When auto rebuild fails the DISK lamp lights in amber Remove and install the hard disk again to restart auto rebuild m Ifthe disk arr
261. ower being off also Forced shutdown Press the power switch continuously at least four seconds This forcibly turns off the power IMPORTANT Set this item to Power on in order to link the AC power source supplied from UPS when the server is connected to UPS 4 30 Configuring Your Server System Management Selecting System Management on the Server menu shows the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility System Management Item Specific Help BIOS Version SSH40 86B 0041 B 0202082017 Board Part 243 630380 Board Serial XXXXXXXXXXX System Part 8100 821F System Serial XXXXXXXXXXX Chassis Part 243 530410 001 Chassis Serial BMC Device ID BMC Device Rev BMC Firmware Rev BMC BBFirmware Rev IPMI Rev F1 Help t Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt gt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit See the table below for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting BIOS Version Indicates the version of BIOS Display only Board Part Indicates the baseboard information Board Serial Display only system Part Indicates the system information Le System Serial Display only Chassis Paty Indicates the chassis information Chassis Serial Display only BMC Device ID Indicates the BMC Baseboard BMC Device Rev Management Controller information preria Rev _ _ ey ee BMC BB
262. owing mass storage devices The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter A list of mass storage devices is displayed Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards WinXP Server 2003 IA 32 and press Enter Then it returns to the screen of step 5 D 6 Installing Windows Server 2003 7 Ifthe optional board is installed select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 RAID Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear For details refer to Getting Started After installation is completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Driver Installation and Advanced Settings and Updating the System of this manual Procedure for License Authentication Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written NOTES Execute the activation within 30 days System may be locked after 30 days is passed m COA label may be attached to your server Updating the System To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures 1 Logon to the system using th
263. p 1 with error is enabled Contact your service representative to 8141 DIMM group 2 with error is enabled replace the four DIMMs in the relevant 8142 DIMM group 3 with error is enabled group 8150 NVRAM Cleared By Jumper Turn off the power Then recover the 8151 Password Cleared By Jumper jumper setting to the original setting 8160 Mismatch Processor Speed detected on Check the frequency of the CPU If itis Processor 1 unknown contact your service 8161 Mismatch Processor Speed detected on representative Processor 2 8162 Mismatch Processor Speed detected on Processor 3 8163 Mismatch Processor Speed detected on Processor 4 frequency frequency 8172 Processor 3 not operating at intended frequency 8173 Processor 4 not operating at intended frequency 817F All processors not operating at intended frequency Online Spare Memory was not ready DIMM type mismatch is detected when the online spare memory feature is enabled Contact your service representative Mirroring Memory was not ready DIMM type mismatch is detected or unnecessary installation in group 2 is detected when the online spare memory feature is enabled Check the DIMM type or installation If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 8 20 Troubleshooting The following figures show the location of specific components referenced in the POST error codes and messages table listed above NOTE Failed CPU or memory boards
264. p automatically configures your server and installs the operating system After a few tasks are completed all that remains to be done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and insert the Windows CD ROM input a product ID number and acknowledge the license agreement For the other operating systems Express Setup initializes the target disk s creates the maintenance partition and installs the various maintenance utilities from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM to lead your server to ready to install for the desired operating system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 3 Express Setup uses Configuration Diskette The Configuration Diskette 1s a floppy disk that includes the configuration information for the server setup used in the automatic installation mode Express Setup will perform all the process of the setup using the information in the floppy disk During this procedure you do not have to be in front of the Express server to confirm the state of the setup Also using the same Configuration Diskette used before allows you to re setup your server with the same condition as before Express Setup includes two types of installation method m Quick start Quick start uses the Configuration Diskette that the configuration parameters for server setup are pre loaded before starting the Express Setup The configuration parameters are loaded by using the Configuration Diskette Creator see Chapter 6 Normal start
265. paper clips enter the server Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock a fire or a failure of the server When such things accidentally enter the server immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from the outlet Do not disassemble the server Contact your service representative Notes on Using Your Server 1 5 Notes on Installing and Accessing the Rack Cabinet 44 CAUTION Do not carry or install the rack cabinet only by a single person More than one person is required to carry or install the rack Failure to follow this instruction may cause the rack to fall to result in personal injury and or breakages of surrounding devices In particular a high rack Such as 44U rack is unstable if it is not fixed by stabilizers More than one person must always carry or install the rack while they support it Do not install the rack cabinet so that the load may be concentrated on a specific point Install stabilizers on the rack so that the total load of the rack and devices mounted on the rack is not concentrated on a singe point or join more than one rack with each other to distribute the load Failure to follow this instruction may cause the rack to fall to result in personal injury Do not install components on the rack cabinet only by a single person More than one person is required to install parts including the doors and trays for the rack Failure to follow this instruction may cause som
266. portant for the server or internal devices to work normally after storage Store the device in the place where temperature ranges between 10 to 55 C and humidity ranges between 20 to 80 without dew condensation m Ifyou use the server after transported or relocated check the system timer and adjust it if necessary If the system timer advances or delays remarkably with the passage of time contact your service representative to repair it The server or internal option device may be dewed if it is brought to a warm place from a cold place suddenly Using a server or an internal device with dew attached may cause malfunction or failure Make sure to adapt them to the operating environment before using them 7 12 Maintenance SS aS 7 Take a floppy disk and a CD ROM out of the server if any Power off the server the POWER lamp goes off Disengage the power cord from the lock spring Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet Remove all the cables from the server Remove the server from the rack cabinet See Chapter 3 for details Hold the server by its bottom with at least another person to carry the server Protect the server with the shock absorbing materials and pack it securely Chapter 8 Troubleshooting If your server does not operate as expected read this chapter before assuming a failure NOTE For provision against an unexpected failure it is recommended to install the Off line Maintena
267. posed to direct sunlight or close to a heater Keep the floppy disk away from cigarette smoke Keep the floppy disk away from any liquid e g water and chemicals Keep the floppy disk away from any magnetic objects e g magnet Do not pinch the floppy disk with a paper clip or drop it Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust A floppy disk has a write protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental erasure You can read data from a write protected floppy disk but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format it NEC recommends that you should write protect any floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about to save data To write protect a 3 5 inch floppy disk use the write protect switch provided on its back Write Write disable enable The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media Dust or thermal changes as well as operator s misconduct or sever failures may cause loss of data To avoid loss of data NEC recommends that you should make a back up copy of your valuable data on a regular basis Make sure to make a back up copy of every floppy disk provided with the server General Description 2 35 CD ROM Drive Your server is provided with the CD ROM drive on its front to read data from a CD ROM read only compact disk The CD ROM provides larger and faster data read than the floppy disk 44 CAUTION M Observe the following instr
268. pported by this server and the available slots 32 bit 33 MHz 64 bit 100 MHz Product name Long Short Hot plug Non hot plug Hotplug _ N8103 81F Disk array controller v v v v v v N8104 103 1000BASE T adapter v v v vv v vV Can be installed Cannot be installed Up to 4 cards can be installed 2 Up to 2 cards up to 4 cards for AFT ALB can be installed Supports hot plug feature 3 Supports hot plug feature Up to 5 cards can be installed 4 Up to 2 cards can be installed Onboard LAN Controller Considerations It is impossible to configure the Teaming function of AFT Adapter Fault Tolerance ALB Adaptive Load Balancing in a standard network controller on board LAN controller And it is also impossible to configure the Teaming function of the same AFT ALB on a standard network controller and an optional LAN board Upgrading Your Server 9 27 Non hot plug PCI Boards This section describes the procedure of installing or removing a PCI board not supporting the hot plug function from a PCI board slot Installation Install a board connected to a PCI board slot in the following procedure Take the following steps to install a PCI board on the riser card IMPORTANT m PCI board slots 3 to 8 can accept 3 3V and universal PCI boards m PCI board slots 1 and 2 can accept 5V and universal PCI boards NOTES m When a PCI board is installed make
269. ppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Installing Windows Server 2003 D 5 Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 1 2 3 Turn on the system power Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Press Ctrl Alt Delete to reset the system After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk press Enter while the message Press any key to boot from CD 1s displayed at the top of the screen If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk this step is unnecessary The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will appear If the screen is not displayed Enter was not pressed properly Begin after turning on the system power again Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration is displayed A screen with a solid blue background is displayed IMPORTANT There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed When the following message is displayed press S Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the foll
270. ptional devices supported by the server Some non supported devices may be physically installed connected but cause failures of the server as well as a malfunctions of the server NEC recommends you use NEC s genuine products Some third party products claim that they support the server However repair of the server due to a failure or damage resulted from use of such third party products will be charged For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard the playback of such a disk with the CD drive is not guaranteed 1 14 Notes on Using Your Server TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY The following must be observed when you transfer or sell the server or software provided with the server to a third party NEC Express server Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third party IMPORTANT About data on the hard disk Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data e g customers information or companies management information on the removed hard disk to any third parties Data seems to be erased when you empty Recycle Bin of Windows or execute the format command of the operating system However the actual data remains written on the hard disk Data not erased completely may be restored by special software and used for unexpected purposes It is strongly recommended that the software or service both available at stores for data erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble expla
271. r and its safety has been tested Do not use the attached power cord for any other purpose Doing so may cause a fire or an electric shock Notes on Using Your Server 1 7 Installation Relocation Storage and Connection 44 CAUTION Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself Your server weighs 33 kg depending on its hardware configuration Carrying the server only by yourself may strain your back Hold the server firmly by its bottom with another person to carry it Do not hold the front bezel to lift the server The front door may be disengaged from the server causing personal injury Do not install your server on a rack with leaving covers removed Do not install your server on a rack with the cover being removed Failure to follow this instruction may reduce the cooling effect in the server to result in some malfunction and or dusts to enter the server to result in a fire or electric shock Do not pinch your finger with rails or other components Note sufficiently that your fingers may not be caught between a rail and another mechanical part or cut by a rail at installation or removal of the server from the rack When unlocking the latched server in the rack cabinet use a screwdriver or tools to press the release levers on the slide rail Pressing the levers with your finger may cause an injury Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from the rack Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from th
272. r Threading Technology feature the specified number of processors is twice as many as the actual number of the installed processors Factory set 4 12 Configuring Your Server Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Slave Selecting Primary IDE Master or Primary IDE Slave on the Main menu shows the following submenu Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Primary IDE Master CD ROM Item Specific Help Type Auto User you enter parameters of hard disk Multi Sector Transfers Disaled drive installed at this LBA Mode Control Disaled connection 32 Bit I O Disaled Auto autotypes Transfer Mode Standard hard disk drive Ultra DMA Mode Disaled installed here 1 39 you select pre determined type of hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM drive is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive is installed here F1 Help t Select Item l Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit gt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Previous Value See the following table for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting Auto Set the IDE device to be the master None The selection of Auto causes the CD ROM device to be detected automatically IDE Removable during execution of POST ATAPI Removable None disables the connected device Other ATAPI User display only t Indicates the number of read write BS heads display only 2 16 Indicates the number of sector
273. r details m Data backup Data backup is to copy data stored in a media into another media e g floppy disk digital audio tape or magnet optical disk IMPORTANT Make sure to make a back up copy of every floppy The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media Dust or thermal changes as well as operator s misconduct or sever failures may cause loss of data To avoid loss of data NEC recommends that you should make a back up copy of your valuable data on a regular basis B 4 Other Precautions CD ROM Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD ROM for the server Press the center of the storage case to remove the CD ROM from the case Do not drop the CD ROM Do not place anything on the CD ROM or bend the CD ROM Do not attach any label onto the CD ROM Do not touch the signal side nothing is printed on this side with your hand Place the CD ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray Do not scratch the CD ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball point pen Do not leave the CD ROM with foods and drinks or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke Do not leave the CD ROM in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD ROM wipe the CD ROM from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently Use the CD cleaner to clean the CD ROM Do not use record spray cleaner benzene
274. r installing Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup tool BEFORE INSTALLING Windows Server 2003 Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server 2003 Installation Installing Service Pack You can install the Service Pack on the server When the Service Pack is not attached to your system prepare it by yourself Updating System If you change the configuration of the system update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM attached to your system Disk Configuration Concerning the area displayed as MAINTE_P In disk area an area displayed as MAINTE P may exist This area is maintenance partition for saving configuration information and utilities Please do not delete the area Re installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk note the following issue m Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS newly m Select Use the current File System for the format of OS partition D 2 Installing Windows Server 2003 MO Device If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation the file system will not be converted normally Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning Media such as DAT During the OS installation do not at
275. r of the connection destination equipment is compatible with the STP cable Connect the equipment to the server through an STP cable of up to 15 m When using an unshielded cable UTP cable confirm that the connection destination equipment is mounted in the rack of the server or a rack linked with the server rack Connect the equipment to the server through a UTP cable of up to 15 m To prevent wrong connection write Serial port on a tag and put the tag to the connector of the serial cable that is to be connected to this server Setting Up Your Server 3 31 JP25 oo Ox ad on Strapped RJ 45 serial port Serial port conversion DTE DTE cross cable cable with the R label attached JP25 on OO o o andj om Strapped RJ 45 serial port Serial port conversion DTE DTE cross cable cable with the R label attached 3 32 Setting Up Your Server Connection to External SCSI Devices Two Ultra 320 SCSI connectors are equipped with the baseboard in your server Ultra 320 SCSI A connector is used to connect the internal SCSI hard disk drives Ultra 320 SCSI B connector is used to connect the internal 5 25 inch SCSI file device or external SCSI devices The internal SCSI cable for 5 25 inch SCSI file device is connected to Ultra 320 SCSI B connector at the factory To connect the external SCSI devices with your server you must change the internal SCSI cable connection by using the attached ex
276. ray configuration is lower than the total capacity of the hard disks configuring the disk array while the disk reliability 1s improved for RAID 1 5 or 0 1 Set Option ROM Scan a parameter of the slot in which a hard disk 1s installed to Enable in PCI Configuration on the Advanced menu of the BIOS utility SETUP Replacement of disk array controller board Back up the disk array configuration information in the disk array controller board to the floppy disk and restore it to the replaced disk array controller board Use the configuration utility for the restoration Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for details Ifa disk array controller is replaced create the configuration information newly by using the proper utility When more than one disk array controller board are installed in the server install the disk array controller board to which the system disk is connected in the PCI slot having the highest boot priority from PCI 1 to 8 For example if four disk array controller boards are installed in PCI slots 3 to 6 the system disk should be connected to the board installed in PCI slot 3 Standard Network An AFT ALB teaming is unavailable in standard network between onboard controllers An AFT ALB teaming with standard network and an option LAN board is also unavailable 9 26 Upgrading Your Server List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots The following table shows the cards su
277. reen appears oave Restore RAID Cont iguration Data Ott ve Me tenance Where an Management el alg Return to the Main Menu The menu items available only in remote console operation among those described in section NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS Based with Local Console are displayed See the previous subsection for detailed explanation of menu items IMPORTANT The followings are varied from the Tools menu in the local console mode m Test items and operation method of System Diagnostics See Chapter 7 for details m Type of disks to be created in Create Support Disk Installing and Using Utilities 6 13 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows Based Master Control Menu The Master Control Menu is used to m Read documentation m Install the management software and m Install the viewer application Adobe Acrobat Reader NOTES Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 or later or Windows NT 4 0 or later m To read documentation HTML and PDF files in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM the HTML browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5 0 or later or Netscape Communicator Version 4 0 or later and Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4 05 or later must be required in your system gt EXPRESSBUILDER Master Control Menu Online Document NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC Express5800 Series Fy e asin Master Control Menu setup fi Fi ry y NSL Quit Copyright NEC Corporation NI EC
278. ring Your Server 4 11 Processor Settings Selecting Processor Settings on the Main menu shows the following submenu Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Main Processor Retest No Select Yes BIOS will clear historical Processor Speed Setting 3 0GHz processor status and retest all processors Processor 1 CPUID OF 26 on next boot Processor 1 L2 Cache Size 512KB Processor 1 L3 Cache Size 4096KB Processor 2 CPUID OF 26 Processor 2 L2 Cache Size 512KB Processor 2 L3 Cache Size 4096KB Processor 3 CPUID Not Istalled Processor 4 CPUID Not Istalled Fl Help t Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit lt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Previous Value See the table below for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting Processor Retest No Clears the error information on the Yes CPU Processor Speed Indicates the frequency of the CPU Setting Processor 1 4 A numeral indicates the ID of CPUID processor Disabled indicates that the processor is defected by BMC Not Installed indicates that the processor is not installed Display only Processor 1 4 Indicates the L2 cache Dan processor L2 Cache Size Processor 1 4 Indicates the L3 cache mannara processor L3 Cache Size Hyper Threading Disabled banaania this item to Enabled allows Technology Enabled the hyper threading technology to be used in the ACPI mode From OS that supports Hype
279. ring Your Server 4 15 Memory Configuration Selecting Memory Configuration on the Advanced menu shows the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Memory Configuration Item Specific Help DIMM Group 1 Status Normal Clear the memory DIMM Group 2 Status Normal error status DIMM Group 3 Status Not Installed Memory Retest Extended RAM Step Disabled Online Sparing Mirroring Memory Disabled F1 Help t Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Ese Exit lt gt Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit See the table below for the items Option Parameter __ _ Description Your Setting DIMM Group 1 Normal Indicates the current memory status 3 Status Not installed Normal indicates that the memory Disabled devices operate normally Disabled indicates that one or more memory devices are defected Not Installed indicates that no memory devices are installed Display only Memory Retest No Clears the DIMM group error status Yes information Extended RAM 1MB 1MB indicates that the memory test Step 1KB is done in the unit of 1MB 1KB Every Location indicates that the memory test is done Disabled in the unit of 1KB Every Location indicates that every memory device is tested Disabled indicates that only memory initialization is done Online Disabled Specify whether the Memory Mirroring Sparing Mirroring Sparing Online Spare Memory feature is M
280. rk Board the network driver will be installed automatically Therefore the driver attached to the Network board should not be used IMPORTANT If you want to utilize optional Network Board N8104 103 open the Advanced in PROSet window and change the Offload TCP Segmentation value to Off Installing SCSI Controller Driver If you utilize SCSI controller driver N8103 65F 75 install it according to the following procedure 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu gt Control Panel Administrative Tools gt Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK Specify the following driver and click Next INITIO INI A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller When N8103 65F board is installed Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP Ultra320 SCSI When N8103 75 board is installed The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 15 Settin
281. rmation on the new disk array controller is saved into a hard disk use this function to restore the configuration information IMPORTANT Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function In that case this menu will not be shown Off line Maintenance Utility Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS independent maintenance program that performs preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server See Chapter 8 or online help for details System Diagnostics Executes various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and if the connection between the server and additional board 1s normal After the System Diagnostics is executed a system check program assigned to each model starts See Chapter 7 for details Installing and Using Utilities 6 7 m Create Support Disk NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities that you can put on floppy disks and load onto your system Using this menu creates a support disk by copying from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM If your system has the Windows operating system you may find it more convenient to use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows based to make support disks Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label which is useful for management in the future Customers are to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creates a support disk for installing Windows
282. rol Panel Double click Intel R PROSet on the Control Panel window Click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Speed and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex Settings value the same as the value specified for HUB 5 Click Apply and click OK Specify the other network driver with the same progress above E 10 Installing Windows 2000 Re install the Network Driver After installing OS and deleting the network drivers if you want to re install the network drivers follow the procedure below 1 2 Restart OS and logon to your system Upgrade Device Driver Wizard dialog box appears Click Next Confirm that the Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended radio button is selected and click Next Select the Specify a location check box and deselect other check boxes Click Next Other Upgrade Device Driver Wizard dialog box opens When using Intel R PRO 1000 XT network connection specify lt CD ROM drive letter gt WINNT W2K BC11 PRO1000 WIN2K When using Intel R PRO 100 network connection specify lt CD ROM drive letter gt WINNT W2K BC11 PRO100 WIN2K Then click OK Click Next Click Finished Other Upgrade Device Driver Wizard dialog box appears Refer to the step 2 to 7 to install After re installing the network drivers the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified Refer to Network Driver described earlier Installing Wi
283. roller may be disabled to reserve an area in the expansion ROM space if the controller has no hard disks connected Domain Validation Enabled Select Enabled Disabled Support Removable Boot Only AIC 78xx BIOS automatically controls the Disks under Int 13 All Disks removable disks as Fixed Disks Disabled BIOS Support for Enabled Select Enabled Bootable CD ROM Disabled Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 43 SCSI Disk Utilities This utility scans the SCSI bus for SCSI devices reports a description of each device Run these utilities before configuring SCSI devices To enter the utility select SCSI Disk Utilities on the Options menu The SCSI ID scan begins displaying the message as shown below AIC 7902 A slot 00 01 04 00 Scanning SCSI ID 0O LUN Number O When the SCSI ID scan completes the screen listing SCSI IDs and associated devices appears Select SCSI Disk and press lt Enter gt SCSI ID 0 SCSI ID 1 SCSI ID 2 SCSI ID 3 SCSI ID 4 SCSI ID 5 SCSI ID 6 SCSI ID 7 SCSI ID 8 SCSI ID 9 SCSI ID 10 SCSI ID 11 SCSI ID 12 SCSI ID 13 SCSI ID 14 SCSI ID 15 No device No device No device No device No device No device ESG SHV_SCA _HSBP_M15 AIC 7902 No device No device No device No device No device No device No device No device Find out the SCSI ID for the installed optional on this screen You can also view the device information by select
284. ror Check if the keyboard is properly connected Replace the baseboard 1 3 3 1 No memory or capacity Check if the DIMM is properly installed check error Remove the DIMM once and then re install it to 1 3 4 3 All memory groups error check if it operates normally Ask your service representative to replace the failed DIMM or baseboard 1 5 1 1 CPU startup error Check if the CPU is properly installed Remove the CPU once and then re install it to check if it operates normally Ask your service representative to replace the failed CPU or processor board No CPU error Check if the CPU is properly installed Remove the CPU once and then re install it to check if it operates normally 3 Ask your service representative to replace the failed CPU or processor board 1 5 4 4 Power failure One of the internal boards has failed Ask your service representative to replace the failed board 2 2 3 1 Unexpected interrupt test Replace the processor or baseboard error NOTE Beep code 1 5 4 2 informs you that AC power supply is interrupted due to power failure or momentary voltage drop and the system is restarted This is not an error 8 22 Troubleshooting SOLVING PROBLEMS When the server fails to operate as expected see the following to find out your problem and follow the instruction given before asking for repair If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem take a note on the
285. rt by mistake To prevent wrong connection write LAN port on a tag and put the tag to the connector of the LAN cable that is to be connected to this server Wiring block diagram of the internal cables RJ 45 serial port Serial port conversion DTE DTE cross cable cable with the R label attached 3 30 Setting Up Your Server Connection between the RJ 45 Serial Port and Device Needing a DCD DSR Signal If a terminal concentrator or the like is to be connected to the RJ 45 serial port thoroughly read the instruction manuals of the connection destination equipment and cable before starting the connection Set the jumper pin of this server to DCD or DSR in accordance with the signal that the connection destination equipment needs The jumper settings and serial port signals of this server are as shown below When directly connecting the server and a terminal concentrator or the like through an RJ 45 cable prepare the cable according to the figure below IMPORTANT m Make sure of the icon of the server and be sure to connect the cable to serial port B Be careful not to connect to a LAN port by mistake m To prevent wrong connection write LAN port on a tag and put the tag to the connector of the LAN cable that is to be connected to this server Be sure to observe the following items to prevent damage to this server and the peripheral device When using a shielded cable STP cable confirm that the connecto
286. rvice representative immediately Take notes on lamp indications of the server and alarm indications on the display unit before consultation which may provide a significant help to your service representative When Having Your Server Repaired Prepare the following when having your server repaired m Certificate Notes of the messages displayed on the display unit m Error information m Records of the NEC Express server and peripheral equipment Error information includes the Error Message shown in Chapter 8 Prepare the error information only when required by your service representative Notes on Using Your Server 1 17 Advice for Health The longer you keep using the computer equipment the more you become tired which may cause disorders of your body When you use a computer observe the following to keep yourself from getting tired Good Working Posture You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a computer e You sit on a chair with your back straight e Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the keyboard e You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height You have good working posture as described in the above when no part of your body is under excess strain in other words when your muscles are most relaxed You have bad posture when you sit with your back hunched up or you operate a display unit with your face close to the screen Bad working posture m
287. s General Description 2 3 Top View 1 Front access cover Open the front access cover e to replace any defected fan with a normal one The fans are hot swappable Do not remove any fans which are not defected If a fan is defected do not replace it by yourself but contact your service representative to request the replacement e to install or remove optional 5 25 inch device and change some internal cable connections 2 Rear access cover Open the rear access cover to install or remove optional PCI boards optional processors and DIMMs 2 4 General Description Front View See Lamps described later ID Ce101 201 Ga 1 Front bezel Remove the front bezel when you access to the POWER SLEEP switch the CD ROM drive or the floppy disk drive or install or remove a hard disk drive from the 3 5 inch hard disk bay The front bezel can be locked by using the attached security key 2 Key hole Insert the security key to lock unlock the front bezel General Description 2 5 Front View with Front Bezel Removed See Chapter 8 for detail information on lamp indication Ob 6d sO OO RJY IS O
288. s LAN interface 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T 1 port 100BASE TX 10BASE T 1 port External Keyboard MINI DIN 6 pin connector 1 port interface MINI DIN 6 pin connector 1 port USB 4 pin 3 ports RJ 45 1 port D sub 9 pin 1 port Network RJ 45 2 ports Ultra320 SCSI 1 port Connecting the external SCSI cable coming with the server is necessary for external use Cabinet design 19 inch rack mounting type 4U External dimensions 483 width x 178 height x 711 depth mm 33 kg Max Power supply 100 to 120 VAC 10 200 to 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 1 Hz 825 VA 800 W Environmental Temperature 10 to 35 C requirements Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Others NEC EXPRESSBUILDER supported NEC ESMPRO provided in the standard configuration A 2 Specifications This page is intentionally left blank Appendix B Other Precautions Transfer Rate of the On board LAN Controller The baseboard includes the two network interface controllers m LAN 1 supports 10Base T and 100Base TX networks and a capable of full or half duplex m LAN 2 supports 10Base T 100Base TX and 1000Base T networks and a capable of full or half duplex The both controllers can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode connected to the HUB However for proper network operation specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Server Management Softw
289. s aed eessatasadansdastecialaci shea ceareiaamtemanaeates 4 45 Vil Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup csseesseee 5 1 A 670 01 6 B40 Resch eel amp 1 b Re Rees meiner ne omen nS ae ae mea a eae eR gee eae ee 5 2 Microso Windows Server 2003 assets cet cou sbecs sats ETE ade toni aepaly eau nenteaee Goneaanaes 5 4 Tris talblatiOi Noti eaea tate sstelarea hae eleanesecmanelieRacwasly A A aa uesenaecuene 5 4 The EUG Wy OU SU Peene caer aire een cacao 5 7 Installing the Windows Server 2003 merane T E A ETE E 5 8 Installing and Setting Device Diy Cr S aoni eih E EEDS nade awe 5 12 SEWE TOP SOVNA PRO ONS MS yerna ETE E EE N 5 15 Installine Mamtenance CICS soorrodni rie nT E a T nets 5 18 Wait the Sys teN iesin a TE EE 5 19 Making Backup Copies of System Information ccccccccccccccccscccecccecceeecececeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeees 5 19 Exceptional SeU 0 een ene errr A E a Meer renin meter ere 5 20 Microsont Windows 2000 senise aa a aa a 5 21 Installation NOCO innin a N a a asakatua saree teeneaaes 5 21 The EE TOWROL S COU ea ete tea vaio taes ochoe to avaueaaen 5 25 Installing the Windows 2000 sediri aeaaea else Wevess deca ved Aaea Eea TEENA 5 26 Installing and Setting Device DIivers ccccccccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 30 Setin for Solving Problems neerseririan tir eE a EE AEE A R LEE AO 5 34 lnstalline Maintenance Utilitie Sassan a e e a E EEE 5 37
290. s and interrupt IRQ for serial port B These menus are displayed if the Serial port B is enabled Specify whether the parallel port is enabled or disabled Selects the parallel port operation mode base address interrupt IRQ and DMA channel for the parallel port These menus are displayed if the Parallel Port is enabled Specify whether the USB keyboard is made available in OS which does not support USB formally PS 2 Mouse Disabled Specify whether the mouse is enabled Enabled or disabled Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 23 Advanced Chipset Control Selecting Advanced Chipset Control on the Advanced menu shows the following screen Positioning the cursor on a menu item preceded by symbol gt and pressing Enter allows the appropriate submenu Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Advanced Chipset Control gt PCI Device Wake On LAN Wake On Ring Sleep Button F1 Help Esc Exit t Select Item lt gt Select Menu See the table below for the items Disabled Disabled Present Item Specific Help Select PCI Device options Change Values Enter Select Sub Menu F9 Setup Defaults F10 Save and Exit Option Parameter _ Description Your Setting Wake On LAN Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Wake On Ring Sleep Button Present Absent Specify whether the remote power on function through network is enabled or disabled Specify
291. s both a network interface and server management interface 2 20 General Description The 82544 controller supports the following features Direct 32 64 bit 33 66 MHz interface to the PCI bus Integrated IEEE 802 3 1000BASE T 1OOBASE TX and 1OBASE T Integrated third generation MAC and proven IEEE 803 3ab compatible PHY Full duplex support for 10 Mbps 100 Mbps and 1000 Mpbs operation Descriptor ring management architecture optimized to deliver both high performance and PCI PCI X bus efficiency m Low power 3 3 V device m IP and TCP UDP checksum off loading System Board Management Controller BMC Server management is concentrated in the System Board Management Controller BMC The BMC and associated circuitry are powered from a 5Vdc standby voltage which remains active when system power is switched off but the ac power source is still on and connected The BMC supports the NEC Management Workstation Application NEC MWA which allows remote server management via a modem or direct connection to a manager system Events monitored by the manager system include over temperature and over voltage conditions fan failure or chassis intrusion Information on NEC MWA may be found on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM included with your server One major function of the BMC is to autonomously monitor system management events and log their occurrence in the nonvolatile System Event Log SEL The events being monitored include overtemper
292. s designed for adjustment of an angle Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders arms and fingers NOTE The keyboard functions depend on the software Refer to the manual that comes with the software for details B 6 Other Precautions Mouse Like the keyboard the mouse 1s a device to instruct your computer Many OS s and application software require the mouse for operation NOTE Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the software For details refer to the manual provided with the software m Use the mouse on a clean desk Using the mouse on a dusty or dirty desk disturbs smooth movement or normal operation of the mouse When your mouse movement seems dull clean your mouse See Chapter 7 Mouse operation includes Click Double click and Drag Click Press the button only once and release it Double click Press the button twice consecutively and release it Drag Press and hold the button and move the mouse Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the keyboard Qe ey WV Double click Appendix C IRQ and I O Port Address The factory set interrupt requests and I O port addresses are listed below Find an appropriate one to install an optional device Interrupt Request The factory set IRQs are assigned as follows IRQ
293. s in the PCI board installed into the slot or the slot itself 7 Printer port connector The printer port connector is connected with a printer with the Centronics interface 2 8 General Description 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 UID lamp blue This lamp is lit when the UID switch is pressed Keyboard connector The keyboard connector is connected with PS 2 type keyboard Mouse connector The mouse connector is connected with the PS 2 type mouse Serial port A connector The serial port A connector is connected with a device having the serial interface The server can t directly be connected to a leased line through the connector Monitor connector The monitor connector is connected with the display unit USB 1 USB 2 connectors The USB 1 upper and USB 2 lower connectors are connected with devices accepting the USB interface Additional PCI board slots Optional PCI boards 32 bit 33MHz may be inserted into the slots Additional PCI board slots Optional PCI boards 64 bit 100 MHz may be inserted into the slots Additional PCI hot plug board slots Optional PCI hot plug boards 64 bit 100 MHz may be inserted into the slots LINK ACT lamp The LINK ACT lamp shows the LAN access status LAN1 connector The LAN1 connector is connected with a network system on LAN This port can be operated through 100BASE TX or 10BASE T interface LAN2 connector The LAN2 connector is connected
294. s of PCI board and frequency to be installed to the PCI slots 5 6 or 7 8 The parameter must be selected before installing the PCI board with hot plug This option is ignored and appropriate parameter of the installed board is applied to the slot by the system after installing the board and rebooting the system Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 19 Embedded SCSI Embedded NIC Embedded Video Controller Selecting Embedded SCSI Embedded NIC or Embedded Video Controller on the PCI Configuration submenu shows the following screen Enabled See the table blow for the items Option Parameter Description Your Setting SCSI Controller Enabled Indicates whether the on board LAN Controller 1 10 100 Disabled controller is enabled or disabled LAN Controller 2 Gbit Video Controller Option ROM Scan Enabled Displays the submenu for indicating Disabled whether the expansion of BIOS of on board controller is enabled or disabled Factory set Only displayed for SCSI and LAN controllers 4 20 Configuring Your Server PCI Slot 1 PCI Slot 8 Selecting each menu on the PCI Configuration submenu shows the following screen Enabled See the table for the item Option Parameter Description Your Setting Option ROM Scan Enabled Disables enables the Option ROM Disabled BIOS on the PCI bus When the graphic accelerator board is installed or the disk
295. s on pS each track display only t Maximum Indicates the drive capacity display pC Capacity only 7 Multi Sector Disabled Indicates the status of multi sector o Transfers 2 Sectors transfer controlled by BIOS 4 Sectors 8 Sectors 16 Sectors LBA Mode Control Disabled Indicates the status of the LBA Enabled Logical Block Access controlled by BIOS 32 Bit I O Disabled Specify whether the 32 bit IDE data Enabled transfer is enabled or disabled Configuring Your Server 4 13 Option Parameter __ _ Description Your Setting Transfer Mode Standard Indicates the data transfer mode Fast PIO 1 between drives controlled by BIOS Fast PIO 2 Fast PIO 3 Fast PIO 4 FPIO 3 DMA 1 FPIO 4 DMA 4 Ultra DMA Mode Disabled Indicates the Ultra DMA mode of data Mode 0 transfer between drives controlled by Mode 1 BIOS Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Factory set 1 Selectable only when the Type is set to User 2 Displayed only when the Type is set to User 3 Displayed only when the Type is set to Auto 4 14 Configuring Your Server Advanced The Advanced menu appears if you move the cursor to the position of Advanced To display a submenu position the cursor on a selection that has a submenu preceded by symbol gt and press Enter Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Item Specific Help gt Memory Configuration gt PCI Configuration Memory Reconfiguration gt T
296. screen to specify the partition that Windows Server 2003 is to be installed appears The first 55MB area displayed on the screen is a partition that is used to store the configuration information or utilities unique of the server We do not recommend to delete this area but if you do not want to reserve this 55MB area perform the installation by manual setup It is unable to delete this area by Express Setup m Ifyou specify other than 120GB for the actual area you may not create the partition specified as the entire area in sizes more than 120GB 10 11 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 11 NOTES m Ifyou click Cancel in Basic Information screen the screen will go back to select the Setup File Cancel exists only in Basic Information screen m Ifyou click OK in Role of Computer screen the setup automatically selects default value for the later specification to continue the installation When all the specification has completed the system reboots automatically Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver If you want to install the optional mass storage driver insert the floppy disk attached to mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the installation Follow the message and take NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and Configuration Diskette out of the CD ROM drive and floppy disk drive and insert Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into the CD ROM drive
297. scribed below 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the front access cover Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover Loosen the two screws with which the fan unit is fixed Lift the fan unit straight to pull out it from the server Remove the memory board ee eS oe eS Remove the cable from the Ultra 320 SCSI B connector on the baseboard IMPORTANT Save the removed cable carefully 10 Connect the external SCSI cable coming with the server to Ultra 320 SCSI B connector on the baseboard 11 Route the cable to the rear of the server See the figure below for the cable routing ii a ee a el Route the cable below the guide rail for the PCI board from the position shown in the figure 9 70 Upgrading Your Server 12 Remove the blank cover from the rear frame by using a flat tip screwdriver le le ii N N MOOWMR AAO E fo MOO ME eA A mD oh m0 0 a ME eA AOD M MOO Oe a a m A gO OOS AO oo MOOOMS AOD om mo oO o mea a am a mo o n me a
298. sed power supply cable connectors are covered with the protective cap to prevent short circuits and electrical hazards When removing the power supply cable connector from the internal devices attach the protective cap to the connector Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock replacement All power flows inside the server while the hot swap replaceable components PCI add in cards hard disk cooling fan and power supply Do not touch the electrical components inside the server to avoid an electric shock N Do not touch any electrical components inside the server during the hot swap Notes on Using Your Server 1 11 During Operation 44 CAUTION Disconnect all the power plugs from the outlet when a thunderstorm is approaching If it starts thundering before you disconnect the all power plugs do not touch any part of the server including the cables Failure to follow this Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms warning may cause a fire or an electric shock Keep animals away from the server Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock An object placed on top of the server may fall down resulting in damage to your property around the server Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server Turn off the cellular phone or pager Radio interference may cause malfunctions of the server Do not remove the cooling fans A A Do not
299. seeeeess E 8 PROSCE n tera ca co uetnee E E we ean acter tase E taste cna E 8 INS WV OL BY meaa aceasta a ete eee E 9 Reainstall the Network Dry Cl atest tacks hatacthaads Aoesntaedaatdassecialaeaues Rare RA E 10 GirapmicsvACCelet alone DIVE da cates casks hatasihaais Saaesiatasstecseus E R deat Se E 11 Installing SCSI Controller Drive oeseri nnana naa nae ne aeons dat oee neds E 11 Setting for Collecting Memory Dump Debug Information cccceeeeeeeseeeeesessesssssseesseeees E 12 Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table cccccecsseesseseesseeeeeeeeeseeneesaees F 1 e 6 R122 bo ea ater ee ae eC eR en eee ce ee eee E E rene eee F ELENARI T EC AAEE cts E E E ee tas E taint else a cases sr ic ae wasted see ae eos nee aed as F 3 Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server 1 2 Notes on Using Your Server WARNING LABELS The warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to inform the user that a hazardous situation may arise when operating the server Do not intentionally remove or damage any of the labels If you find any labels totally partially removed or illegible due to damage contact your sales representative A CAUTTON D The following Symbols have the same meaning HERRER HERETER P To avoid the risk of personal inJury handle the disk tra
300. semble repair or alter the server Do not look into the CD ROM drive Do not remove the lithium battery Disconnect the power plug before working with the server Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not lift the server only by a single person Make sure to complete board installation Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component High temperature Put a connector cover on an unused connector Upgrading Your Server 9 3 ANTI STATIC MEASURES The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity Avoid failures caused by static electricity when installing or removing any optional devices Wear a wrist strap an arm belt or anti static glove Wear a wrist strap on your wrist If no wrist strap 1s available touch an unpainted metal part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your body Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static electricity Select a suitable work space Work with the server on the anti static or concrete floor When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated make sure take anti static measures beforehand Use a work table Place t
301. side down and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove it 4 Take out the ball from the mouse Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand and turn your hand holding the mouse the mouse is on your palm with the button upward The mouse ball is released onto your palm Mouse ball Mouse ball cover Bottom View Roller 5 Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water and squeeze it firmly 6 Rub off stains on the mouse ball Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in Step 5 Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol Wipe stains slowly and carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab 9 Blow out any dust from the mouse Protect your eyes from the dust 10 Put the mouse ball back into the mouse 11 Place the mouse ball cover and rotate it clockwise until it is locked 7 6 Maintenance Cleaning CD ROM A dusty CD ROM or dust accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD ROM regularly 1 Make sure that the server is powered the POWER SLEEP lamp is lit 2 Press the Eject button on the front of the CD ROM drive The tray comes out 3 Hold the CD ROM lightly and take it out from the tray NOTE Do not touch the signal side of the CD ROM with your hand 4 Wipe the tray wit
302. smission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts 3 Run PROSet exe in the following directory CD ROM DriveLetter WINNT W2K BC11 PROSet WIN2K The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Choose Typical and click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finish Or P Pe Restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 31 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 4 3 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears Click Start menu Click Settings and Click Network Connections The Network Connections dialog box appears Right click Local Area Connection and click Properties from pop up menu Click Configure The property dialog box for network adapter appears Click the Advanced and
303. stalling the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk E 4 Installing Windows 2000 INSTALLING Windows 2000 Preparations for Installation NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Microsoft Windows 2000 Server CD ROM or Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server CD ROM Windows 2000 Service Pack CD ROM User s Guide Getting Started Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Before installing create Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NOTE If you have already Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows 2000 you do not need to create it again You can create Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures oe ae ee oI Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows 2000 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER use this procedure If Windows 2000 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server you can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below Prepare one 3 5 inch floppy disk Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off
304. stance IMPORTANT The power supply unit engaging its connector causes the resistance To avoid damaging the power supply unit do not tilt or twist the unit as you push it into the connector Push the power supply unit into the slot until the locking tab snaps into place Tighten the captive screw that retains the power supply unit 9 12 Upgrading Your Server 6 Connect two power cords Use the power cord provided with the standard power supply unit and the one provided with the optional unit The AC Standby lamps the SB1 and SB2 lamps go on when the power cords are connected IMPORTANT Dust cover is attached to the AC inlet 2 connector Keep the removed dust cover for future use m Fasten the power cords with the lock spring AC inlet for additional power supply unit _ e 2 9 LAI Ea m m n N mn ni T Ea ic i fill NL Ypi O E i i O A l SNPA aE a a B 8 8 B1
305. start the upgrade installation from the beginning If PROSet is already installed uninstall the PROSet before upgrading If the teaming function is enabled disable the function before uninstalling PROSet During upgrade installation Disk Insert dialog box may appear If it appears click Cancel When upgrade installation is completed Device Driver Wizard dialog box may appear If it appears click Cancel then update the system Installing Windows Server 2003 D 9 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section please refer to the document attached to the driver PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Clic
306. such as the UPS turn on the power control unit Connect the power cord and wait a few seconds before pressing the POWER switch The POWER switch does not work in a few seconds after connecting the power cord due to BMC Baseboard Management Controller firmware start up POWER SLEEP lamp ae POWER switch ELI VO 202 0 3 36 Setting Up Your Server The POWER SLEEP lamp on the front of the server comes on In a few seconds the NEC logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self Test POST begins The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard operation Ctrl Alt Delete The POST runs diagnostics initializes the server sets interrupt vectors detects installed peripheral devices and boots the operating system if installed See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST If the server halts before completing the POST the POST emits a beep code indicating a fatal system error requiring immediate attention See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for troubleshooting information During memory test the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and test Depending on the amount of installed memory it may take several minutes to complete the memory test NOTE The factory set is defined to hide the POST screen with the NEC logo screen You can always change the NEC logo screen to the POST screen by pressing Esc To change the start up screen use the BIOS se
307. sure that the terminal section of the board securely mates with the connector of the PCI board slot m The insulators are installed between the PCI board slots They are for protecting the PCI board already been installed Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when installing or removing the PCI board If the insulator is taken off reinstall the insulator in place 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare IMPORTANT To avoid damage to the system and devices always turn off the system before installing the non hot swap board Pull out the server from the rack Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover You can ignore this step when installing the board to the PCI slots 5 to 8 Define the slot in which a board is installed Press the retention tab at the tip of the additional slot cover to unlock and open the tab IMPORTANT Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more Doing so could damage the tab 9 28 Upgrading Your Server 10 11 Remove the expansion slot cover IMPORTANT Keep the expansion slot cover being removed carefully Remove the dust cover IMPORTANT Keep the dust cover being removed carefully On the edge opposite the connectors grasp the board by both corners Orient the board to the vacant hot plug slot so that the metal retention bracket is toward the rear of the chassis Insert the board into the front an
308. t be corrected in Run SETUP spite of the start of SETUP contact your service representative 0230 System RAM Failed at offset Contact your service representative 0231 Shadow Ram Failed at offset 0232 Extended RAM Failed at address line 0250 System battery is dead Replace Contact your service representative to replace the and run SETUP battery After restarting the computer start the SETUP to provide the setting again System CMOS checksum bad The default values have just been set Start the Default configuration used SETUP to provide the setting again If the error cannot be corrected contact your service representative 0252 Password checksum bad The password has just been cleared Start the Passwords cleared SETUP to provide the setting again System timer error Start the SETUP to set the date and time again If the 0270 Real time clock error same error occurs successively in spite of the resetting 0271 Check date and time setting contact your service representative 0280 Previous boot incomplete Default Contact your service representative configuration used 02B0 Diskette drive A error Start the SETUP to set the Legacy Floppy A and Diskette drive B error Legacy Floppy B in the Main menu again If the same error occurs successively in spite of the resetting contact your service representative 02B2 Incorrect Drive A type run SETUP Start the SETUP to provide the setting again If the 02
309. t bezel follow these steps 1 Position the front bezel so the mounting tabs of the front bezel are aligned with their mounting holes on the front of the system Slide the bezel right until the bezel snaps into place Close and lock the front bezel Upgrading Your Server 9 5 TOOLS AND SUPPLIES NEEDED m Phillips screwdriver Small flat tip bladed screwdriver m Extraction tool for processor heat sink clips m Antistatic wrist strap and conductive foam pad recommended m Pen or pencil m Product Configuration Record Table Appendix E As you integrate new parts in to the system record the model and serial number of the server system all installed options and any other pertinent information specific to the server system 9 6 Upgrading Your Server DEVICE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE Install or remove a component from the server in the following procedure Hard Disk Drive The server has five slots to install hard disks Ultra 320 SCSI in the 3 5 inch disk bay of the front of the server IMPORTANT m Do not use any hard disks that are not authorized by NEC Installing a third party hard disk may cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk Purchase hard disks of the following models N8150 161F 18 1 GB 10 000 rpm Ultra 320 N8150 162F 36 3 GB 10 000 rpm Ultra 320 N8150 163F 73 2 GB 10 000 rpm Ultra 320 N8150 171F 146 GB 10 000 rpm Ultra 320 N8150 164F 18 1 GB 1
310. t the device that you want to unplug Intel R PRO 100 S Server Adapter 2 Upgrading Your Server 9 41 6 Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove then click on Next The Add Remove Hardware Wizard terminates Add Remove Hardware Wizard Confirm Device o Poa tan Are you sure you want to unplug this device SY Windows will attempt to stop the following devices Click Next to stop these devices Intel R PRO 100 S Server Adapter 2 7 Click on Finish Add Remove Hardware Wizard 7x Completing the Add Remove Hardware Wizard SS You have successtully completed the Add Remove Hardware wizard You may safely remove the following device Intel R PRO 100 Server Adapter PILS8470B If you frequently need to unplug this device Windows can give you an icon on the taskbar to quickly unplug or eject your device If you would like to use this option check the following 2 Pull out the server from the rack with the power being on 3 Remove the rear access cover and locate the board to be removed NOTE Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off and that the PCI Slot Fault lamp is flashing 4 Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board 9 42 Upgrading Your Server 5 Push the tab to unlock it slowly open the tab then remove the PCI board IMPORTANT Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more Doing so could
311. t the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter MegaRAID SCSI 320 2 Controller Driver When N8103 81F board is installed Press R to select the recovery option Select the keyboard If you are requested press R to select system recovery procedure If you are requested select either of the procedure below Manual Recovery Press M Do not select this option unless you are a high level user or a system administrator If you use this option you can recover the problems of system files partition boot sector and start up environment Quick Recovery Press F This option is very easy to use and the user does not need to do anything during the procedure If you select this option the system recovery disk program starts to recover the problems concerning system files partition boot sector of system disk and start up environment if multiple operating systems are installed on the system Follow the instruction displayed on the screen and then press L at the screen which request you to insert system recovery disk The system will be restarted once NOTE Starts the procedure without system recovery disk Repeat steps 1 to 10 The recovery procedure will be started During the recovery the missing files and the damaged files are replaced either to the files in C 386 folder of hard disk or the files in systemroot Repair of the system partition These replaced files do not reflect the changes of the configuration after the setup
312. tach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system such as DAT Partition Size The minimum required partition size for installation of Windows Server 2003 1s 2900MB Paging file size Dump file size Paging file size recommended installed memory 1 5 Dump file size Installed memory size 12 MB IMPORTANT m The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug information memory dump If you set the default value of paging file size smaller than the recommended value the accurate debug information memory dump may not be collected m The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size m The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if installed memory size is 512MB the minimum required partition size is 2900MB 512MB 1 5 512MB 12MB 4192MB Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size 2 See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enoug
313. tandby memory group When this feature is used the current memory group and the standby memory group should be located in DIMM group 1 and DIMM group 3 respectively Memory boards DIMM cannot be installed in DIMM group 2 m How to enable the memory mirroring feature Installing additional memory boards Add memory boards DIMM according to the User s Guide The memory boards for mirroring should be installed to memory slots belonging to DIMM group 3 The installed memory boards must be the same capacities and type as the memory boards installed as DIMM group 1 The table below shows combinations of DIMMs installed DIMM group 3 d eee gibi ddd Memory boards for mirroring A 1GB 256MB 4 Notinstalled 1GB 256MB 4 B 2GB 512MB 4 Notinstalled 2GB 512MB 4 4GB 1GB 4 4GB 1GB 4 D 8GB 2GB 4 8GB 2GB 4 NOTES m 1GB 256MB 4 memory boards are installed in DIMM group 1 as standard when the server is delivered m Column DIMM group 3 shows sockets for online spare memory 9 52 Upgrading Your Server Online Spare Memory The online spare memory feature places a memory group as spare memory in standby state If the current memory group often exceeded the predefined threshold for the maximum number of correctable ECC errors occurrence the online spare memory feature automatically switches to the standby memory group by copying the contents of the current memory group into the standby memor
314. tape drives m The SCSI hard disk drive bay for installing up to five SCSI hard disk drives m The SCSI disk drives can be easily installed or removed The drive carrier allows you to access to disk drives from the front of the system If disk drives are provided with RAID configuration within the system a disk drive can be swapped with another without power interruption in the system hot swap NOTE The SCSI hard disk drive bays contain a hot swap back plane that require an 80 pin single connector attachment SCA connector on the drives that you install 2 16 General Description Memory Mirroring Feature Memory mirroring is a new high availability feature on your server Memory mirroring allows the server to continue operation if a DIMM error is encountered With memory mirroring one degraded memory group is automatically disengaged and the operation is switched to the other memory group This brings the reliability of the system to memory uncorrectable error without any service interruption and without compromising system availability To enabling memory mirroring feature 1t is necessary to install the DIMMs in group 1 for a normal operation and to install the DIMMs in group 3 for standby In this case it doesn t allow the system to install DIMMs in group 2 Online Sparing Memory Feature Online spare memory is a new high availability feature on your server Online spare memory allows the server to continue operatio
315. tative A voltage error warning was Contact your service representative detected 8 6 Troubleshooting DISK ACCESS Lamp The DISK ACCESS lamp indicates the state of hard disks in the 3 5 inch disk bay This lamp lights in green every time any of such hard disks is accessed When the DISK ACCESS lamp is lit in amber it indicates that a hard disk error occurred To identify a failed hard disk see the lamps provided for each hard disk TTI O ORo O DISK ACCESS lamp LAN1 LAN2 ACCESS Lamp The LAN1 LAN2 ACCESS lamp is lit green when the server is connected to LAN The lamp blinks while the server is accessed through the LAN for packet transmission The value next to the icon indicates the number of the network port on the rear panel LAN2 ACCESS lamp LAN1 ACCESS lamp Troubleshooting 8 7 UID Lamp Pressing the UID switch turns the UID lamp located on the front and rear of the server on and off The UID lamp is visible through the rear of the chassis and allows you to locate the server you re working on from the rear of the servers on a rack UID lamp UID switch UID lamp Access Lamps
316. ter grade canned air and a small brush for cleaning the interior Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server A WARNING Z Unplug all power cords Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance Voltage is present inside the server and display unit even after the power is turned off All voltage is removed only when the power cord is unplugged Turn off the server and unplug all power cables Remove the top cover See Chapter 9 Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the baseboard Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the baseboard I E SS Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the interior of the server gt Reinstall the top cover See Chapter 9 7 Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server Maintenance 7 5 Cleaning the Keyboard Mouse Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off powered the POWER lamp goes off and then wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation To keep the mouse ball clean use the mouse in a place with little dust Follow the steps below to clean the mouse regularly 1 Prepare cold or lukewarm water neutral detergent alcohol two dry soft clothes and cotton swabs 2 Make sure that the server is off powered the POWER SLEEP lamp goes off 3 Turn the mouse up
317. ternal SCSI cable see Chapter 9 for details If your system can connect with the external SCSI devices observe the following notices For notes on connecting the optional add in SCSI card refer to the manual that comes with the optional card m Choose the SCSI ID between 0 and 6 that hasn t been assigned to any other SCSI device connected to your server m Enable the SCSI termination or connect the SCSI terminator to the device that is at the end of SCSI chain m Only one SCSI device can be connected to your server A maximum of two devices when N8141 28AF device expansion unit is connected m Use the SCSISelect utility to make the setting for the connected SCSI device m When an external SCSI devices is connected the device can operate at the transfer rate shown in the table below depending on the internal line length of the connected device and the total length of SCSI cables Internal line length of Maximum Sync Transfer SV ATAAFAR STEP external SCSI device and transfer rate Rate width total length of SCSI cables MB sec in SCSI Select 2 m or shorter Narrow 8 bit Wide 16 bit 11 m or shorter 320 160 80 Auto Wide 16 bit only for LVD 1 The total length of SCSI cables should be 1 m or shorter if the NB141 28AF device expansion unit is installed 2 The value is set to Auto at the shipment For some SCSI devices the transfer rate may be restricted To install a SCSI device read the manual co
318. the edited data to the floppy disk and then reads such the stored data during the setup to proceed a series of procedures The floppy disk used is called Configuration Diskette Installing and Using Utilities 6 5 Express Setup Express Setup is intended for initial setup of the server Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for software selection and configuration The program loads the utilities and drivers applies RAID settings partitions the disk and installs the desired operating system If you install Windows Server 2003 Windows 2000 after a few tasks are completed all that remains to be done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and install the Windows CD ROM input a product ID number and acknowledge the license agreement IMPORTANT m The Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server system and therefore the Express Setup clears the contents of the hard disk m When the setup is started do not turn off the server until the setup is completed and also make sure not to remove the Configuration Diskette from the floppy disk drive until the message that allow you to remove it appeared Tools Tools is also intended for initial setup of the server It provides more installation options than Express Setup and permits the user to quickly create utility support disks run the Off line
319. the tab to secure the PCI board The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once and then goes on NOTES m Ifthe server runs on Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 the operating system automatically recognizes the additionally installed PCI board and installs the driver m If an error occurred in the installed board or slot the PCI Slot Fault lamp goes on amber Be sure to close the tab slowly and correctly Abruptly closing the tab may cause the system to fail to recognize the PCI board Reinstall the rear access cover and place the server into the rack Take the following steps to check if the additionally installed PCI board is recognized and operating properly 1 Select Control Panel Administractive Tools Computer Management and Device Manager in the order to start the Device Manager 2 Move the cursor to the added board 215 x Action View I H Sm 2 w Tree m Computer amp Disk drives Display adapters 5 DVD CD ROM drives 3 Floppy disk controllers amp Floppy disk drives IDE ATA ATAPI controllers 3 Keyboards A Mice and other pointing devices Monitors EF Network adapters SF Intel R PRO 100 5 Server Adapter 8 Intel R PRO 100 5 Server Adapter 2 WY Ports COM amp LPT amp SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers m System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Computer Management Local H i System Tools E
320. this system contact the CPU manufacturer to see if this mix of processors is supported Data Bytes C Words 0000 00 00 00 00 0l 00 d4 00 0008 00 00 00 00 29 00 00 40 TERS tor 0010 OZ 00 00 00 29 00 00 40 EEA 0018 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 opinn lek fete tafe Celeh fey on eee OK Cancel Apply Click Management Tool Event Viewer from the Control Panel 2 Select the type of the log to collect On Application Log the events related to the running application is archived On Security Log the events related to the security is archived On System Log the events occurred at the item which configures Windows 2000 system is archived 3 Click Save as in the Run menu 4 Input the file name of archived log in the File Name box 5 Select the type of the log file you want to save in the File Type list box and click OK For more information refer to Windows 2000 Online Help Troubleshooting 8 39 COLLECT CONFIGURATION INFORMATION This section describes on how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside specification In order to collect information Diagnostic Program is used IMPORTANT If STOP error system error or stall occurred follow the procedure below after restarting the system 1 Point to Settings in Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears 2 Double click Management Tool and dou
321. tilize SCSI controller driver N8103 65F 75 install it according to the following procedure 1 Start Device Manager from Start menu Control Panel Administrative Tools gt Computer Management Double click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device Click Update Driver When the Update Device Driver Wizard appears select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next Select Don t search I will choose the driver to install and click Next Click Have Disk Insert Windows Server 2003 OEM DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive enter a into copy manufacturer s file from and click OK Specify the following driver and click Next INITIO INI A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller When N8103 65F board is installed Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP Ultra320 SCSI When N8103 75 board is installed The installation of the driver is completed Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen D 12 Installing Windows Server 2003 SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP DEBUG INFORMATION Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 Appendix E Installing Windows 2000 This section describes the procedures for installing Windows 2000 without using Express Setup tool BEFORE INSTALLING Windows 2000 Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows
322. tion holes in the server or openings in the floppy disk or CD ROM drive Doing so may cause an electric shock S Do not use the server in any unapproved place Install the server on a standard EIA 19 inch rack cabinet Do not install the rack containing the server in a place inappropriate to the rack installation environment Failure to follow these instructions may cause some bad influences to be imposed on your server and other systems installed on the rack and also a fire or personal injury due to falling of the rack may occur For the detailed explanation on the place where your server should be installed and the earthquake resistant construction for the rack refer to the manual attached to the rack or contact your service representative S Always install the server on a rack conforming to the relevant standard Install the server on a rack confirming to the EIA standard for the server to be used Do not use the server with installed on any other rack than standard EIA 19 inch rack or without the installation on a proper rack Failure to follow these instructions may cause your server to operate incorrectly and or personal injury or damages of surrounding devices to occur Contact your service representative for the racks available for your server 1 4 Notes on Using Your Server 44 CAUTION A A Keep water or foreign matter away from the server Do not let any form of liquid water etc or foreign matter e g pins or
323. to eject the CD ROM tray Make sure that the front bezel is removed before running the command Running this command with the front bezel installed may cause the CD ROM tray or the media to hit against the front bezel resulting in a failure of the server Clean the server on a regular basis See Chapter 7 for cleaning Regular cleaning proactively prevents various failures of the server Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop To prevent this problem it is recommended to use of an uninterruptible power supply unit Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions is applicable After carriage of the server After storage of the server After the server is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition enduring the server operation temperature 10 C 35 C humidity 20 80 Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month When the system clock is installed in a system requiring high time precision it is recommended to use a time server NTP server If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of adjustment contact your sales agent to ask maintenance Notes on Using Your Server 1 13 Store the unit under the storage condition temperature 10 C 55 C humidity 20 80 without condensation to allow built in devices and the unit to operate correctly in the next operation Make sure to use o
324. to power off Select Server AC LINK Last State m To keep the server off powered even when power is supplied from the UPS Select Server AC LINK StayOff Boot To change the boot order of devices connected to the server Select Boot and specify the boot order To display POST check results Select Advanced Boot time Diagnostic Screen Enabled You can also press Esc while the NEC log is on the screen to display POST check results To control from the HW console Select Server Console Redirection and set each item Configuring Your Server 4 5 Memory To enable the memory degradation feature Select Advanced Memory Processor Error Halt To check the installed memory DIMM board status Select Advanced Memory Configuration and check the status indications The on screen DIMM group numbers and socket locations on the baseboard are associated as shown in the following figure To clear the memory DIMM board error information Select Advanced Memory Configuration Memory Retest Yes and reboot To enable the memory mirroring online sparing memory feature Select Advanced Memory Configuration Online Sparing Mirroring Memory and set each 4 6 Configuring Your Server CPU To enable the CPU degradation feature Select Advanced Memory Processor Error Halt To check the installed CPU status Select Main Processor Settings and check the
325. to the online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM 6 20 Installing and Using Utilities NEC MWA NEC MWA is an application that enables the remote management of the server through a management PC over the network A management PC is a computer running NEC ESMPRO Manager Refer to MWA First Step Guide in the following directory of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM for details of its functions and operation CD ROM drive mwa doc en mwa_fsg pdf NOTE How to install MWA is described in online documents See MWA Installation Guide for details Servers to be Remotely Managed by MWA The server with RomPilot or BMC can be managed by MWA This product has BMC IPMI1 5 Precautions MWA First Step Guide is common to all the managed servers The followings are notes and restrictions for this product The serial port B or LAN 1 port is used to communicate the Base Management Controller BMC in the server with the management PC Installing and Using Utilities 6 21 Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console This subsection describes the procedures for using BIOS SETUP utilities and DOS based tool on the server with remote console in case that the server is not connected the console like as keyboad The following two methods are available m Through the management PC via LAN m Through the management PC with direct connection Through the management PC via LAN 1 Click Program
326. trator can track long term and short term performance monitor server usage create graphs to record trends and check server failure rates The administrator can use the information collected to create more efficient data routing procedures and optimize server usage Functions and Features The ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network These features help the system administrator perform daily system operation system extension and transfer tasks Some features of ESMPRO Manager include m Hardware and software server configuration Hardware resources mounted in servers such as the CPU memory disks disk arrays and LAN boards Software resources such as operating system information and drivers running on each server m Server failures On screen real time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type location cause and suggested corrective action Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature memory failure crashes and software failure information m Performance ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen and displays information such as the rate of CPU load memory usage disk usage and LAN traffic Usage threshold values can help the system administrator monitor and prevent server overloads For installation procedure and detailed explanations on NEC ESMPRO refer
327. tton on the server name to display the Properties dialog box Execute Connection Check on the ID tab page When you want to operate other tools remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM from the CD ROM drive and turn off and on the server from MWA Remote Control Manager to start other tools Select Power control command from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button on the server name You can turn off on the server IMPORTANT When the Operation with remote console is end remove the check of RESET of Activate in thr Properties dialog box and reboot the server 6 24 Installing and Using Utilities Through the management PC with direct connection 1 Click Program NEC MWA MWA from the start menu on the management PC installed NEC MWA MWA will start and open Remote Control Manager A MWA Remote Control Manager fel x File Server Edit View Tools Help A BOn agt eaj Top Group IP Address Telep Select Environment Direct Connection Setting from the File menu of MWA Remote Control Manager to display the Direct Connection dialog box Then provide the following setting lt Direct Connection gt Port No COM port on the management PC to be connected Baud Rate 19200 Flow Control RTS CTS Select Configuration from the File menu of MWA Remote Control Manager to display the Configuration dialog box Select New to display the Select a model dialo
328. tup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 for details During the POST you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS SETUP utility stored in ROM on system board or on an installed option board Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the BIOS setup For the BIOS SETUP for the server see Chapter 4 For the BIOS SETUP for the option board refer to the manual that comes with the option board Setting Up Your Server 3 37 INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM See Chapter 5 for installing the Microsoft Windows 2000 To install the other operating system listed above contact your service representative IMPORTANT m Use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup of your server The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is a support software for the server It simplifies the process of installing and configuring your server See Chapter 6 for details on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Before installing the operating system adjust the system date and time by using the BIOS setup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 detail INSTALLING UTILITIES Install the utilities that come with the server See Chapter 6 for details MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server Save the information after completing the system setup Without the backup data you will not be able to recover the information You can save the information by the
329. uch pressure can damage the socket Keyed DIMMs insert only one way 9 10 11 12 13 14 Upgrading Your Server 9 49 Gently push the levers to the upright position until they engage the notches in the DIMM 3 Install the components you removed in steps to 5 Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages If POST displays an error message take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 8 Start the SETUP and select Advanced Memory Configuration to verify that the installed DIMM shows the status Normal See Chapter 4 or details Select Yes for Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data See Chapter 4 for details If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 is in use set the paging file size to the recommended value total memory size 1 5 or a greater value See Chapter 5 for details 9 50 Upgrading Your Server Removal Remove the DIMM depending on the following procedure os ie ae Oe oie Se 10 NOTES To remove the failed DIMM check the error message appearing in POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket group in which the failed DIMM 1s installed See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Pull out the server from the rack Remove the rear access cover Remove the CPU access cover Remove the
330. uctions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See YO pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details m Do not leave the tray ejected from the CD ROM drive Set a CD ROM on the CD ROM drive in the following procedure 1 Confirm that the power of the server is on with the POWER SLEEP lamp being lit in green before setting the CD ROM on the CD ROM drive 2 Press the Eject button on the front of the CD ROM drive The tray comes out a little 3 Hold the tray lightly and pull it out toward you until the tray stops 4 Put the CD ROM on the tray carefully and securely with the date recorded surface facing toward the tray 2 36 General Description 5 As shown in the figure below hold the tray with a hand and press the CD ROM with fingers of another hand to make the hole of the CD ROM fit to the rotor at the center of the tray Press this part of CD ROM 6 Push the front of the tray lightly to retract it into the drive IMPORTANT If a noisy sound in driving the CD ROM drive occurs after setting a CD ROM set it again correctly To take out the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive press the Eject button in the similar way in setting the CD ROM to make the tray go out If the access lamp is lit in orange the CD is being accessed Confirm that the access lamp is not lit before pressing the Eject button As shown in the figure below hold the tray with a hand
331. unctions and parameters as well as the factory set for each menu Main After entering SETUP the Main menu appears first To display a submenu position the cursor on a selection that has a submenu preceded by symbol gt and press Enter Main Advanced Security Server The items which can be set on the Main menu screen and their functions are described below 4 10 Configuring Your Server Option Parameter Description Your Setting System Time HH MM SS Set the time fo System Date MM DD YYYY Set the date tf Legacy Floppy A Legacy Floppy B Hard Disk Pre Delay Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Slave Language Disabled 1 2MB 5 25 720Kb Chel 1 44 1 25MB 3 5 2 88MB 3 5 Disabled 1 2MB 5 25 720Kb 3 5 1 44 1 25MB_ 3 5 2 88MB 3 5 Disabled 3 seconds 6 seconds 9 seconds 12 seconds 15 seconds 21 seconds 30 seconds English US French German Spanish Italian Set the settings of floppy disk drive A standard configuration Normally set to 1 44 1 25MB 3 0 Set the settings of floppy disk drive B Set to Disabled since the server does not support drive B Set the waiting time in first accessing to the IDE device during POST Set the information on the device connected to each channel on the submenu The settings of some items may be changed However leave the items as they are at the shipment Select the language used for SETUP Factory set Configu
332. uration Diskette out of CD ROM drive and floppy disk drive and insert Windows 2000 CD ROM into CD ROM drive Software License Agreement screen appears Read the contents carefully and click I agree or press F8 if you do agree If you do not agree click I disagree or press F3 IMPORTANT Ifyou do not agree to this agreement the setup terminates and Windows 2000 will not be installed m If NetWare Gateway and Client Service is specified to install the window to specify the details of NetWare Gateway and Client Service pops up on the first logon Specify the appropriate value If you selected Apply on Apply Service Pack at Basic Information follow the procedure below 1 Follow the message to take Windows 2000 CD ROM out of CD ROM drive 2 Follow the message to insert Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 or later into CD ROM drive Windows 2000 and the specified application will be installed automatically and logon to the system Install and configure the device drivers Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed 5 30 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Installing and Setting Device Drivers Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers PROSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet tran
333. uration Diskette Creator and select Trekking Administrator g Manage Your Server gg My Computer Command Prompt Ce Contral Panel r me Gia Administrative Tools Jf Windows Explorer k a Printers and Faxes fa Notepad Help and Support L Remote Assista 9 Windows Catalog e Windows Update un Accessories I Administrative Tools ff Configuration Diskette Creator I NEC ESMPRO Agent A SMBE I Startup 2 Internet Explorer S Outlook Express bei Remote Assistance 2 Click Create new information files from the File menu The Disk Environment dialog box will be displayed Configuration Diskette Creator File Option HELP Create new information Files Ctrl N Modify information files Ctrl 0 Print Ctrl P Print Preview Printer Setup Exit Creating new setup information files Installing and Using Utilities 6 17 3 Specify each item and click on OK The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order such as Basic Information dialog box Basic information i x System type Express5800 110Eg OS Installation path Windows I Apply Service Pack m System Partition Create new partition fer 92 MB 4095 999999MB C Use existing partitions C Create All Area IV Convert File System to NTFS lt Back Cancel Help 4 Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click on
334. vent Viewer Oy System Information E Performance Logs and Alerts H J Shared Folders S Device Manager cS Local Users and Groups E Sj Storage C Disk Management g Disk Defragmenter amp Logical Drives H E Removable Storage ae Services and Applications MOS CS ec ee ee lie 9 34 Upgrading Your Server 3 Display the General dialog in the property to confirm that the device 1s normally operated Intel R PRO 100 S Server Adapter Properties The message in the property depends on the location of the PCI board slot Upgrading Your Server 9 35 Hot Remove Take the following procedure to execute Hot Remove 1 Take the following steps to stop the device driver used by the Hot plug PCI board you want to remove IMPORTANT Before removing a PCI board be sure to stop the driver of the slot containing the PCI board from the operating system Failure to do so may cause the system to fail 1 Open Add Remove Hardware in Control Panel The Add Remove Hardware Wizard starts 2 Click on Next Add Remove Hardware Wizard x Welcome to the Add Remove Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you add remove unplug and troubleshoot your hardware To continue click Next Cancel Add Remove Hardware Wizard Choose a Hardware Task Which hardware task do you want to perform Select the hardware task
335. ver Put the templates on the front and rear of the rack to locate them The installation positions of the core nuts and slide rail assembly are specified on the templates CABO OOHOOOO OOOOH OOOOOHOOAHOOOHOOHGOOOOHEIL IF ENB rel FRONT O 243 307116 001 Aami SEAL THDES Toooooonooooo o So g HOOOOobooood Icons showing the positions at which core nuts are installed Template front Template rear 3 10 Setting Up Your Server 2 Install the core nuts coming with the rack at the positions defined by the templates Install four core nuts two for each of left and right sides on the front face of the rack from the inner side The server is fixed to the rack with the core nuts four screws C and four washers A Install two core nuts from the inner side of the rear of the rack at the left side when you faces the rear of the rack When the core nuts are installed on a rack with the distance between the front and rear mount faces of 700 or 743 mm fix the arm bracket 700 to the core nuts Hang the lower clip of a core nut on the proper rectangular hole and insert the upper clip into the hole using a flat tip driver or a similar tool IMPORTANT Install the core nuts so that the clips are located at the top and bottom If any core nut is installed with the clips located at the left and right ends the server may be dropped to cause it to be defected and also people to be injured severel
336. ver from a power outlet Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth a ae Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water and squeeze it firmly Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4 Soak a soft cloth in water squeeze it firmly wipe the server with it once again Wipe the server with a dry cloth ee ee Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth 7 4 Maintenance Cleaning the Interior One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of the interior of the server especially around the baseboard Dust buildup inside the server can lead to several problems As dust acts as a thermal insulator a buildup can prevent proper system cooling Excessive heat will shorten the life of server components Also dust may contain conductive or corrosive materials that can cause short circuits or corrosion of electrical contacts How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is located For most office environments you probably should clean the server every 12 months For more severe environments clean the interior every 6 months Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover You will need a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection compu
337. vertical refresh rate The baseboard supports disabling of the onboard video through BIOS Setup or when a plug in video card is installed in any of the PCI slots General Description 2 19 SCSI Controller The baseboard includes an embedded Adaptec AIC 7902 which contains two independent channels You can enable or disable the SCSI controller in BIOS Setup Both channels support 16 bit SE or LVD SCSI operations at the following speeds m Ultra320 320 MB sec m Ultral60 160 MB sec m Ultra 2 80 MB sec m Ultra Wide SE 40 MB sec The baseboard provides active terminators termination voltage resettable fuses and protection diodes for both SCSI channels You can disable the onboard terminators in BIOS Setup Network Interface Controllers NOTE To ensure EMC product regulation compliance the system must be used with shielded LAN cables The baseboard includes two network interface controllers NICs m Intel 82550 NIC that supports 10Base T and 100Base TX networks m Intel 82544 NIC that supports 10Base T 100Base TX networks and 1 OOOBASE T networks The 82550 controller supports the following features m 32 bit PCI m Integrated IEEE 802 3 10Base T and 100Base TX compatible PHY m FEE 820 3u auto negotiation support m Chained memory structure similar to the 82559 82558 82557 and 82596 m Full duplex support at both 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps operation m Low power 3 3 V device m IP checksum off loading NIC 1 can be used a
338. wapped IMPORTANT Do not remove the fan that is normally operating Ask your service representative for replacement of the cooling fan Ifa cooling fan fails do not continue to operate the system but ask your service representative for replacement as soon as you can FAN Fault lamp 8 14 Troubleshooting ERROR MESSAGES If an error occurs in the server an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server Error Messages after Power on Powering on the server automatically starts the self diagnostic program POST Power On Self Test When the POST detects any error it displays an error message and its measure on the display unit Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors However even when there is no hardware failure use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a keyboard controller error and stop processing m Immediately after the server is powered Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction simultaneous key entry of Ctrl Alt Delete Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction m During hardware initialization following restart of the POST When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason restart the server once again If the same error message reappears you may assume there is no hardware error To ensure normal operation of the server however make sure to follow th
339. ware programs are updated IMPORTANT Do not turn off the server while the update program is running If the update processing is discontinued the system becomes unable to start m System Management The parameters of BMC Baseboard Management Controller are set for remote control and alert m Help Displays explanations about various functions of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER m Return to the Top Menu Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu 6 10 Installing and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with Remote Console This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS based with remote console NEC EXPRESSBUILDER contains the remote console feature that allows the system administrator to set up the server from the management workstation management PC via the network or the server s COM2 serial port IMPORTANT m Do not use this feature on any other computer than the server or on any other server obtained without the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Doing so may cause a failure of the server m When a keyboard is connected to the server the remote console feature is disabled The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console Nothing is displayed on the management PC Starting The following two methods are available to start the server m Running NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via LAN m Running NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via direct connection COM
340. whether the remote power on function through a serial port is enabled or disabled Determine whether SLEEP switch is masked or unmasked Selecting Absent disables the SLEEP switch after booting up Factory set 4 24 Configuring Your Server PCI Device Selecting PCI Device on Advanced Chipset Control of the Advanced menu shows the following screen See the table below for the items Your Setting PCI IRQ line 1 14 Disabled Set the assignment of each of 16 PCI IRQ line 17 32 Auto Select interrupt signals on the PCI bus to a specific IRQ request Parameters 5 10 and 11 cannot be selected if they are the same as those set for BMC IRQ in the Server menu Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 25 Security Positioning the cursor to Security shows the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Security Item Specific Help User Password Is Clear Supervisor Password Is Clear Set User Password Enter Superviosor Password Set Supervisor Password Enter controls access to the setup utility Password on boot Disabled Fixed disk boot sector Normal Secure Mode Timer 2 hr Hot Key CTRL ALT L Secure Mode Boot Disabled Video Blanking Disabled Floppy Write Protect Disabled Power Switch Inhibit Disabled Selectable only when User Password is registered Fl Help t Select Item l C
341. with a network system on LAN This port can be operated through 1000BASE T 100BASE TX or 10BASE T interface 100 10 lamp The 100 10 lamp indicates the LAN transfer rate 1000 100 10 lamp The 1000 100 10 lamp indicates the LAN transfer rate Internal View N O oo FP WO N Fan bay 6 Cooling fans are located in this bay Electronics bay Additional PCI board slots 8 slots Hot Plug PCI LED Board Memory board Processor board air duct Cover open sensor General Description 2 9 2 10 General Description a FF W N Electronics Bay Hot plug PCI board slots Non hot plug PCI board slots Dummy sponge Processor board Baseboard General Description 2 11 Baseboard 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 Additional PCI board slots 8slots 1 1 PCl 1 and 2 1st PCI Bus 32 bit 33MHz 5V PCI arranged from right to left 1 2 PCI 3 and 4 3rd PCI Bus 64 bit 1OOMHz 3 3V PCI X arranged from right to left 1 3 PCI 5 and 6 4th PCI Bus 64 bit 1OOMHz 3 3V PCI X Hot plug arranged from right to left 1 4 PCI 7 and 8 5th PCI Bus 64 bit 1OOMHz 3 3V PCI X Hot plug arranged from right to left 2 Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB connector 3 Hot Plug PCI LED Board connector 4 Rear panel I O connectors see page 2 7 5 Processor board interface connectors 6 Jumper switch for clearing CMOS password 7 Hot swap back plane HSBP Primary connector 8 COM B connector 9 USB 3 connector 10
342. x 2 High reliability E Memory mirroring feature m Online sparing memory feature E Memory monitoring feature single bit error correction double bit error detection m CPU memory degradation feature logical isolation of a failed device m Bus parity error detection E Thermal sensor E Error notification E Internal cooling fan monitoring feature E Internal voltage monitoring feature E BIOS password feature mM Security feature security lock m Redundant power supply m Disk array optional Management Utilities E NEC ESMPRO m NEC Management Workstation Application NEC MWA Expandability m Wide variety of optional I O slots Two 32 bit 33 MHz PCI slots Six 64 bit 100 MHz PCI X sots four slots support hot plug m Large memory of up to 24 GB mM 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay holds five hot swap SCSI hard disk drives E Remote power on feature E Up to four multi processors are available for upgrade m Many SCSI device connection patterns m USB interface Many Available Features E Graphic accelerator RAGE XL support E El Torito Bootable CD ROM no emulation mode format support POWER switch mask Software power off Remote power on feature AC LINK feature Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI feature E Baseboard Management Controller BMC E Remote console feature Self diagnosis m Power On Self Test POST E Test and Diagnosis T amp D Maintenance Features m Off line Mainten
343. y 3 Pull out either one of the inner rails from the slide rail assembly If the inner rails are pull out these are locked once at a position of the way Push the release lever to release the lock and pull out the inner rails further Inner rail Release lever Setting Up Your Server 3 11 4 Install an inner rail on one side of the server with three screws A in the direction shown in the figure Release lever NOTE Each inner rail may be used at either of the left and right sides However use the proper inner rail to each slide rail assembly from which the rail has been removed so that the direction of the inner rail can be fit to the slide rail assembly 5 Install the other inner rail on the other side of the server by steps 3 and 4 above 6 Install handles R and L on the front of the server with four screws B NOTE The left handle is different from the right handle in shape Check the shape of each handle The handle L has the frame on which the tab of the front bezel 1s hung Handle L Handle R Frame on which tab is hung Left side of server Right side of server 3 12 Setting Up Your Server 7 After removing the screw located on the rear of the server install the adapter bracket on the rear of the server with a single screw B and a screw removed before N MS W Screw removed from the rear of the server ke Screw
344. y Old symbol with care when inserting removing from the system aeaaea A r New symbol or A RH CAUTION Ai SR bs WS Be A OT ZEAE TT PRET ALRARPVEM Only green area is available for Hot Swap or Hot Plug operation To avoid electric shock disconnect all AC cords before accessing to others inside the system 133 312898 757 A 1 TAKERE SR after powering down allow ample time for 4 PEA cooling prior to handling BRITA E A E As the hard disk drives may retain heat AN A Ee CAUTION ep Ee WARE SE See rh tae arama Biscormect all AC porer cords from bat h e7eban ATEENA De atk and externa oerioherals prior to Install ine remoyina options Aiak REP BRAN a W ERETERSERRESANS EHSA MERAT Do not drop any screws Inside bha sesten AN To avoid the risk of Oe aria i ME POTTS WL Ae 1 s damage to the unit Refer bo che User s Guide when option beards or periaherals are Inatalled A move the unit with Incorrect Installations may result In cenape to kha systen and lead to eccidants at least two or et adi ERIE more people Irmla hold Eha botton of tha systan shen required to fft and corry the srsbem AR 1 fee ra Attached to the CPU access cover A amp CAUTION AM AN ARRET RESIS Ea EARRA R h ARRE BIE OT BIRARE Ee HET REP HT PAE HAH As some components may become very hot during system operation give ample time to allow co
345. y Express Setup _ Process that continues automatically Oo Process that need to input or select Read notes and restrictions Go back Confirmed Select how to install No Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Confirmed Select Setup Parameter File v New File v Existing File Select OS Check Setup Parameter File Correct Terminate Retrieve again If you need to reset the specification Incorrect Confirm the setting select whether or not to modify Confirm the specification and input the value E Insert Windows CD ROM Disk Array Configuration 1 l Restart l od F Agree Software License Agreement Creating A Aae Partition Restart Re select l Installing Utilities Insert SP CD ROM Express Setup l Log on Automatically y l Restart 2 Creating OS Partition l Restart l Formatting OS Partition l Copying NEC Modules l After restarting the computer the installation completed Copying Selected Application Modules 1 The process is operated only when Disk Array Controller Board is connected and the configuration is specified 2 If you select Others the process is completed here 5 26 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Installing the Windows 2000 This section describes on how to setup the system using Express Setup Prepare Configuration Diskette You can operate the i
346. y group This feature enables continuous operation without replacement of the memory board m How to enable the online spare memory feature Installing additional memory boards Add memory boards DIMM according to this chapter The installed memory boards must be the same capacities and type as the memory boards installed as DIMM group 1 and DIMM group 2 Memory slots are as shown for DIMM group 3 The table below shows combinations of DIMMs installed DiMMgroup 1 DIMMgroup 2__ DIMM group 3 1GB 256MB 4 1GB 256MB 4 B 1GB 256MB 4 1GB 256MB 4 1GB 256MB 4 2GB 512MB 4 2GB 512MB 4 2GB 512MB 4 2GB 512MB 4 4GB 1GB 4 Not installed 4GB 1GB 4 F 4GB 1GB 4 4GB 1GB 4 4GB 1GB 4 8GB 2GB 4 Not installed 8GB 2GB 4 8GB 2GB 4 8GB 2GB 4 8GB 2GB 4 NOTES 1 Column DIMM group 3 shows sockets for online spare memory 2 1GB 256MB 4 Memory boards are installed in DIMM group 1 as standard when the server is delivered Setting BIOS The menu item below has been added to Memory Configuration which is explained in Chapter 4 To enable the memory mirroring online spare memory feature change the setting of the item to each The item is factory set to Disabled Item Parameter Online Sparing Mirroring memory Disabled Sparing Mirroring Upgrading Your Server 9 53 m Others Memory capacity displayed on the OS total capacity of physically install
347. you want to perform and then click Next Add Troubleshoot a device Choose this option if you are adding a new device to your computer or are having problems getting a device working lt Back Cancel 9 36 Upgrading Your Server 4 Select Unplug Eject a device for removal task then click on Next Add Remove Hardware Wizard Choose a Removal Task You can remove a device permanently or temporarily Add Remove Hardware Wizard Select Device to Unplug Select the device that you want to unplug Intel R PRO 100 S Server Adapter 2 Upgrading Your Server 9 37 6 Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove then click on Next The Add Remove Hardware Wizard terminates Add Remove Hardware Wizard Confirm Device o Poa tan Are you sure you want to unplug this device SY Windows will attempt to stop the following devices Click Next to stop these devices Intel R PRO 100 S Server Adapter 2 7 Click on Finish Add Remove Hardware Wizard 7x Completing the Add Remove Hardware Wizard SS You have successtully completed the Add Remove Hardware wizard You may safely remove the following device Intel R PRO 100 Server Adapter PILS8470B If you frequently need to unplug this device Windows can give you an icon on the taskbar to quickly unplug or eject your device If you would like to use this option check the following

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

xPad Handbuch - Mediabeam GmbH  DECOLLE ETIQUETTE  pdf 18kb  Viniflora®Prelude TM  Toshiba 170F All in One Printer User Manual  CS 299 & M XL  Westinghouse 120Hz User Guide  request for proposal for mobile application the institute of  Z06 Rear Muffler and Butterfly Valve Vacuum Assembly Installation  Dossier candidature Appel à Projets 8e  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file